Rohde & Schwarz RTP Series User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Rohde & Schwarz Manuals
  4. Test Equipment
  5. RTP Series
  6. User manual

Rohde & Schwarz RTP Series User Manual

High-performance oscilloscope
Hide thumbs Also See for RTP Series:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
R&S
RTP
High-Performance Oscilloscope
User Manual
(=UñÂ2)
1337995202

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the RTP Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz RTP Series

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz RTP Series

  • Page 1 ® R&S High-Performance Oscilloscope User Manual (=UñÂ2) 1337995202...
  • Page 2 ® This manual describes the following R&S RTP models with firmware version 4.15: ● ® R&S RTP044 (1320.5007K04) ● ® R&S RTP064 (1320.5007K06) ● ® R&S RTP084 (1320.5007K08) © 2019 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0 Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164 Email:...

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    ® Contents R&S Contents 1 Preface....................25 Safety Information.......................25 Documentation Overview................... 26 1.2.1 Manuals and Instrument Help..................26 1.2.2 Data Sheet and Brochure....................27 1.2.3 Release Notes, Open Source Acknowledgment............28 1.2.4 Application notes, Application cards, Videos..............28 Options Described in this Document................ 28 Conventions Used in the Documentation..............29 1.4.1 Typographical Conventions...................29...
  • Page 4 ® Contents R&S 2.3.10 Getting Information and Help..................75 3 Instrument Setup..................78 System Setup......................78 3.1.1 System Settings......................78 3.1.2 Setting the Display Language..................82 Screen Setup....................... 83 3.2.1 Screen Settings......................83 3.2.2 Aligning the Touchscreen....................84 Frontpanel Setup......................85 3.3.1 Setup: Luminosity Settings....................85 3.3.2 Hardkeys: Function Assignment...................
  • Page 5 ® Contents R&S 4.1.3 Horizontal System....................... 116 4.1.4 Probes......................... 117 Horizontal Settings....................121 4.2.1 Setup...........................121 4.2.2 Acquisition........................125 4.2.3 Fast Segmentation...................... 129 Vertical Settings......................131 4.3.1 Channels........................132 4.3.2 Coupled Channels.......................134 4.3.3 Power Calculation....................... 134 High Definition Mode....................135 4.4.1 High Definition Settings....................135 4.4.2 Effects of the High Definition Mode................
  • Page 6 ® Contents R&S 4.8.3 AUX OUT........................179 Setting Up the Waveform..................180 4.9.1 Adjusting Passive Probes................... 180 4.9.2 Setting Up the Signal Input with Autoset..............180 4.9.3 Adjusting the Signal Input Manually................181 4.9.4 Setting the Acquisition....................181 4.9.5 Starting and Stopping Acquisition................182 4.9.6 Using the Roll Mode....................182 4.9.7...
  • Page 7 ® Contents R&S 5.3.15 Triggering on Serial Buses..................210 5.3.16 Triggering on Parallel Buses and Digital Channels............. 210 Qualification......................210 Holdoff........................212 Noise Reject.......................213 Control / Action......................215 Sequence........................218 5.8.1 B-Trigger Setup......................219 5.8.2 R-Trigger Setup......................221 Zone Trigger (Option R&S RTP-K19)...............221 5.9.1 About Trigger Zones....................222 5.9.2...
  • Page 8 ® Contents R&S 6.4.2 History Setup.......................265 6.4.3 Using History.......................268 XY-Diagram........................ 270 6.5.1 Settings for XY-Diagrams.................... 270 6.5.2 Displaying an XY-Diagram..................272 7 Measurements..................274 Cursor Measurements....................274 7.1.1 Cursors and Results of Cursor Measurements............274 7.1.2 Using Cursors......................276 7.1.3 Settings for Cursor Measurements................
  • Page 9 ® Contents R&S 8.2.3 Configuring Spectrograms..................371 8.2.4 Spectrogram Configuration Settings................372 9 Mask Testing..................375 About Mask Testing....................375 9.1.1 Results of a Mask Test....................375 Mask Test Settings....................377 9.2.1 Test Definition......................377 9.2.2 Mask Definition......................379 9.2.3 Event Actions /Reset ....................386 9.2.4 Mask Display.......................388 Working with Masks....................389...
  • Page 10 ® Contents R&S 10.4.1 Result Presentation Settings..................419 10.4.2 Configuring the Search Results Presentation............. 422 10.5 Noise Reject.......................423 10.5.1 Noise Reject Settings....................423 10.5.2 Defining Noise Rejection for Searches............... 424 11 Data and File Management..............425 11.1 Instrument Settings....................425 11.1.1 Savesets........................427 11.1.2 One File........................429 11.1.3...
  • Page 11 ® Contents R&S 12.1.1 Decode - General Settings..................469 12.1.2 Full Autoset......................... 470 12.1.3 Display........................470 12.1.4 Label Lists........................473 12.1.5 Bit Pattern Editor......................476 12.2 I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1)..................477 12.2.1 The I²C Protocol......................477 12.2.2 I²C Configuration......................479 12.2.3 I²C Trigger........................481 12.2.4 C Label List.......................
  • Page 12 ® Contents R&S 12.6.3 LIN Trigger........................558 12.6.4 LIN Label List......................562 12.6.5 LIN Decode Results....................565 12.6.6 Search on Decoded LIN Data..................567 12.7 Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8)....... 571 12.7.1 The Ethernet Protocol....................572 12.7.2 Ethernet Configuration....................572 12.7.3 Ethernet Trigger......................
  • Page 13 ® Contents R&S 12.11.2 M-PHY Configuration....................655 12.11.3 M-PHY Trigger......................658 12.11.4 M-PHY Decode Results....................673 12.11.5 Search on Decoded M-PHY Data................676 12.12 Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50)..........690 12.12.1 Custom: Manchester / NRZ Protocols.................691 12.12.2 Custom: Manchester / NRZ Configuration..............692 12.12.3 Custom: Manchester / NRZ Trigger................
  • Page 14 ® Contents R&S 12.16.3 USB 3.1 Trigger......................799 12.16.4 USB 3.1 Decode Results.................... 802 12.16.5 Search on Decoded USB 3.1 Data................806 12.17 USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63)................810 12.17.1 The USB Power Delivery Protocol................810 12.17.2 USBPD Configuration....................812 12.17.3 USBPD Trigger......................815 12.17.4 USBPD Decode Results.....................
  • Page 15 ® Contents R&S 13.3.1 Trigger Settings for Digital Signals and Parallel Buses..........887 13.3.2 Triggering on Digital Signals and Parallel Buses............896 13.4 Measurements on Digital Channels................ 897 13.5 Data Export........................ 897 13.6 Mathematics......................898 13.7 Search........................899 14 Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6)........900 14.1 Setup of the Waveform Generator................
  • Page 16 ® Contents R&S 16.1.5 Track of Jitter Measurement Results................941 16.1.6 Jitter Spectrum......................942 16.2 Clock Data Recovery....................942 16.2.1 Software CDR ......................943 16.2.2 Displaying the Recovered Clock Signal..............945 16.3 Mask Testing on Eye Diagrams................945 17 Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122)......... 948 17.1 Configuring the Measurement Setup for Deembedding........948 17.2...
  • Page 17 ® Contents R&S 19.2 Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection..............972 19.2.1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network..............973 19.2.2 Assigning the IP Address.................... 974 19.2.3 Using Computer Names....................975 19.2.4 Changing the Windows Firewall Settings..............977 19.3 Web Interface......................978 19.3.1 Settings on the R&S RTP....................978 19.3.2 Web Browser.......................979 19.4...
  • Page 18 ® Contents R&S 20.4.5 Event Parameter....................... 1014 20.4.6 Bit Pattern Parameter....................1015 20.5 Common Commands....................1015 20.6 General Remote Settings..................1020 20.7 Instrument Setup.....................1024 20.7.1 System Setup......................1024 20.7.2 [Quick Action] Setup....................1028 20.7.3 Display Settings......................1030 20.7.4 External Application....................1042 20.8 Acquisition and Setup.................... 1043 20.8.1 Starting and Stopping Acquisition................
  • Page 19 ® Contents R&S 20.9.10 Data2Clock Trigger....................1116 20.9.11 State Trigger......................1118 20.9.12 Pattern Trigger......................1119 20.9.13 TV/Video Trigger......................1121 20.9.14 Line Trigger....................... 1126 20.9.15 Trigger Qualification....................1126 20.9.16 Holdoff........................1129 20.9.17 Noise Reject......................1133 20.9.18 Trigger Sequence...................... 1135 20.9.19 Trigger Control......................1138 20.9.20 Actions on Trigger.....................
  • Page 20 ® Contents R&S 20.12.9 Track and Trend......................1227 20.12.10 Gating........................1228 20.12.11 Limit check and Event Actions.................. 1231 20.12.12 Reference Levels...................... 1234 20.13 Spectrum Analysis....................1246 20.13.1 Basic FFT........................1246 20.13.2 Waveform Data......................1258 20.13.3 Spectrogram (Option R&S RTP-K37)................1259 20.14 Mask Testing......................1261 20.14.1 Mask Test Definition....................
  • Page 21 ® Contents R&S 20.15.17 Search Results......................1314 20.16 Data Management....................1319 20.16.1 Instrument Settings....................1320 20.16.2 Savesets and One File....................1327 20.16.3 Autonaming....................... 1328 20.16.4 Waveform Data Transmission................... 1329 20.16.5 Waveform Data Export to File................... 1329 20.16.6 Waveform Histogram Export to File................1336 20.16.7 Numeric Results......................1337 20.16.8...
  • Page 22 ® Contents R&S 20.18 Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1)............1877 20.18.1 Digital Channels......................1878 20.18.2 Parallel Bus Configuration..................1881 20.18.3 Digital Resolution...................... 1887 20.18.4 Trigger Settings for Digital Signals and Parallel Buses..........1888 20.18.5 MSO Data ........................ 1895 20.19 Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6)............1898 20.19.1 Waveform Generator Setup..................
  • Page 23 ® Contents R&S 21.5 Storing and Packing....................1953 21.6 Maintenance Information..................1953 Annex....................1955 A Menu Overview.................1955 File Menu........................1955 Horizontal Menu...................... 1956 Trigger Menu......................1956 Vertical Menu......................1956 Math Menu....................... 1957 Cursor Menu......................1957 Meas Menu.......................1958 Masks Menu......................1958 Analysis Menu......................1958 A.10 Display Menu......................
  • Page 24 ® Contents R&S C.3.1 Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)......1977 C.3.2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)............ 1978 C.3.3 Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)....1978 C.3.4 STATus:OPERation Register..................1979 C.3.5 STATus:QUEStionable Register................1980 Application of the Status Reporting System............

  • Page 25: Preface

    ® Preface R&S Safety Information 1 Preface 1.1 Safety Information The R&S RTP oscilloscope is designed for measurements on circuits that are only indi- rectly connected to the mains or not connected at all. It is not rated for any measure- ment category.

  • Page 26: Documentation Overview

    ® Preface R&S Documentation Overview Risk of injury Do not exceed the voltage limits given in Chapter 2.2.1, "Front Panel", on page 38. Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions An unsuitable operating site or test setup can damage the instrument and connected devices.

  • Page 27: Data Sheet And Brochure

    ® Preface R&S Documentation Overview examples, and information on maintenance and instrument interfaces. Includes the contents of the getting started manual. The online version of the user manual provides the complete contents for immediate display on the internet. Manuals for compliance test options For compliance test options, extra test procedure manual are available.

  • Page 28: Release Notes, Open Source Acknowledgment

    ® Preface R&S Options Described in this Document www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/rtp 1.2.3 Release Notes, Open Source Acknowledgment The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current firmware version, and describe the firmware installation. The open source acknowledg- ment document provides verbatim license texts of the used open source software. It can also be read directly on the instrument.

  • Page 29: Conventions Used In The Documentation

    ® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation Type Designation Order No. R&S RTP-K50 Custom Manchester and NRZ serial triggering and 1337.8762.02 decoding R&S RTP-K52 8b10b serial triggering and decoding 1337.8779.02 R&S RTP-K55 MDIO serial triggering and decoding 1337.8785.02 R&S RTP-K57 100BASE-T1 serial triggering and decoding 1800.6548.02 R&S RTP-K60...

  • Page 30: Conventions For Procedure Descriptions

    ® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation 1.4.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When operating the instrument, several alternative methods may be available to per- form the same task. In this case, the procedure using the touchscreen is described. Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an addition- ally connected mouse.

  • Page 31: Getting Started

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 2 Getting Started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the R&S RTP Getting Started manual for R&S RTP instruments. ● Preparing for Use....................31 ● Instrument Tour....................... 38 ● Operating the Instrument..................

  • Page 32: Positioning The Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 2.1.2 Positioning the Instrument The instrument is designed for use under laboratory conditions. It can be used in standalone operation on a bench top or can be installed in a rack. 2.1.2.1 Bench Top Operation For standalone operation, place the instrument on a horizontal bench with even, flat surface.
  • Page 33 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Risk of injury when stacking instruments A stack of instruments can tilt over and cause injury if not stacked correctly. Further- more, the instruments at the bottom of the stack can be damaged due to the load imposed by the instruments on top.

  • Page 34: Starting The Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 2.1.3 Starting the Instrument Risk of injury Connect the oscilloscope to an outlet that has a ground contact. If grounding is not ensured by the mains system, ground the oscilloscope using the protective earth conductor on the front panel and an appropriate cable. Do not use an isolating transformer to connect the oscilloscope to the AC power sup- ply.
  • Page 35 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Risk of losing data If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting the power cord, the instrument loses its current settings. Furthermore, program data can be lost. Press the Power key first to shut down the application properly.

  • Page 36: Connecting External Devices

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 2.1.4 Connecting External Devices The following interfaces for external devices are provided: ● USB connectors at the front and rear panel of the instrument ● Monitor connectors DVI-D and DisplayPort at the rear panel of the instrument ●...
  • Page 37 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Connecting a keyboard The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The default input lan- guage is English – US. To configure the keyboard properties: 1. Tap the "Find" icon (magnifier) on the Windows taskbar. 2.

  • Page 38: Instrument Tour

    ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 3. Select the "System" tab. 4. Tap "Display / Monitors". 5. To show the instrument's display content only on the external monitor, select "Pro- jector only". To show the instrument's display content on both the oscilloscope and the external monitor, select "Duplicate".
  • Page 39 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Figure 2-1: Front panel of R&S RTP 1 = Touchscreen 2 = Setup controls 3 = Horizontal controls 4 = Trigger controls 5 = Analysis keys 6 = Navigation controls 7 = External trigger input 8 = Vertical controls 9 = Input channels 10 = Two option slots for R&S RTP-B1 (MSO) or R&S RTP-B1E (for R&S RT-ZVC) , R&S RTP-B6 (wave-...
  • Page 40 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Channel inputs and external trigger input The R&S RTP has four channel inputs to connect the input signals, and an external trigger input to control the measurement by an external signal. The input connectors are provided with a special Rohde & Schwarz active probe inter- face, and they are BNC compatible.

  • Page 41: Rear Panel

    ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour One of the options can be installed in one of option slots at the front panel, or in the option slot at the rear panel. The maximum input voltage is 40 V peak at 100 kΩ input impedance. The maximum input frequency for a signal with the minimum input voltage swing of 500 mV (V ) is 400 MHz.
  • Page 42 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Figure 2-2: Rear panel of R&S RTP 1 = AC power supply connector and main power switch 2 = USB device connector, type B 3 = USB connectors, type A 4 = LAN connector 5 = DVI-D connector for external monitor 6 = DisplayPort connector 7 = GPIB connector...
  • Page 43 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour USB Device USB 3.0 interface of type B (device USB), to be used for remote control of the instru- ment. Four USB type A connectors. Two connectors comply with standard USB 3.0, and the other two with standard USB 2.0.

  • Page 44: Keys And Controls

    ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The input frequency ranges from 1 MHz to 20 MHz in 1 MHz steps. The input impe- dance is 50 Ω. The output frequency of the OCXO is 10 MHz, the impedance is 50 Ω. For detailed specifications, refer to the data sheet.
  • Page 45 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour ● Save waveform data and measurement results ● Define a naming pattern for autonaming of files [Setup] Opens and closes the "Setup" dialog box, where you can: ● Access Windows configuration and install firmware updates ●...
  • Page 46 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour [Res Rec Len], [Horizontal] Open and close the "Setup" tab in the "Horizontal" dialog box, where you can: ● Adjust the time scale, and acquisition time ● Adjust the horizontal position, and reference point ●...
  • Page 47 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour "Reference point" defines the position of the reference point on the screen. Turn clock- wise to move it to the right. The reference point marks the rescaling center of the time scale. It is indicated by a gray triangle outline at the top of the diagram. If you modify the time scale, the reference point remains fixed on the screen, and the scale is stretched or compressed to both sides of the reference point.
  • Page 48 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour [Logic] Opens the dialog box for configuration of parallel buses and digital channels. The key lights up if you enable at least one parallel bus. You can switch off the selected bus using the [Signal Off] key. [Ref] Opens the "Reference"...
  • Page 49 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour [Trigger] Opens and closes the "Trigger" dialog box, where you can: ● Select a trigger type and configure it. ● Set general trigger parameters and control the acquisition run. ● Qualify the trigger event with logic patterns. ●...
  • Page 50 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour [Single] Starts a defined number of acquisitions. A green light indicates a running acquisition. A red light shows that acquisition is stopped. Press the key again to stop running acquisi- tions. To set the number of acquisitions, press the [Trigger] key, select the "Ctrl/Action" tab, and set "Average count (N-single count)".
  • Page 51 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour App Cockpit Opens the "App Cockpit" dialog box, where you can start an application or analysis function directly, without knowing its position in the menu or toolbar. The "App Cockpit" button on the left end of the menu has the same effect. [Zoom] Displays a zoom diagram for the active diagram.
  • Page 52 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour See also: Chapter 2.3.7, "Using Dialog Boxes", on page 71 Navigation rotary knob The navigation knob has various functions: ● In numeric entry fields: turn to increase or decrease the value. ● In tables: press to activate the edit mode, turn clockwise to increase the value or turn counterclockwise to decrease it, and press to enter the value and move to the next cell.

  • Page 53: Operating The Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument In diagrams, they switch the focus between zoom areas, cursor lines, and gates. Checkmark [☑] The checkmark key [☑] has different functions depending on the focus: ● In usual dialog box: if the focus is on a selection list, the key opens the list and applies the selected value.

  • Page 54: Means Of Manual Interaction

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Remote operation The remote desktop connection of Windows can be used for instrument control and file transfer. Even on computers with non-Windows operating systems, a remote desktop connection is possible using RDP applications. For details, refer to the User Manual, chapter "Remote Desktop Connection".

  • Page 55: Touchscreen Display

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2.3.2 Touchscreen Display 2.3.2.1 Information on the Display The touchscreen of the instrument shows the waveforms and measurement results, and also information and everything that you need to control the instrument. All wave- form-related display elements are shown in Figure 2-3.
  • Page 56 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument By default, the diagram name contains the diagram number and the short names of the waveforms shown inside. To change the diagram name, touch and hold the tab name. The on-screen keyboard opens to enter the new name. Names must be unique. To arrange the diagrams on the screen, the Rohde &...
  • Page 57 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 2-5: Signal label on the sidebar 1 = Vertical scale 2 = Vertical position 3 = Coupling and Termination 4 = Acquisition mode 5 = Offset 6 = Actual bandwidth, can be less than the instrument bandwidth depending on the number of active chan- nels and other settings If the sidebar contains many icons and not all icons are visible, touch one of the icons and move it up or down until the required icon appears.
  • Page 58 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Histogram and histogram area (9, 10) A histogram shows the frequency of occurrence of voltage or time values in a bar chart directly in the diagram. The rectangular histogram area indicates the part of the wave- form that is considered in the histogram.

  • Page 59: App Cockpit

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Toolbar (1) The icons on the toolbar provide quick and easy access to the most important function- ality. For a detailed description, refer to Chapter 2.3.5, "Toolbar", on page 63. Menu bar (3) The menus provide access to the complete functionality of R&S RTP.

  • Page 60: Working With Waveforms

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2.3.4 Working with Waveforms The R&S RTP can create and display several types of waveforms: ● Channel waveforms: Up to three waveforms per input channel can be shown. For a four-channel instru- ment, 12 channel waveforms are available. ●...
  • Page 61 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument ● Waveforms can be minimized to signal icons showing a small real-time signal view. Thus, more space in the diagram area is available without switching off waveforms. ● Diagrams are displayed on tabs – you can arrange them side by side or one above the other.
  • Page 62 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument To minimize a waveform ► Choose on of the following ways: ● Tap the "Minimize" icon in the upper right corner of the waveform's signal label in the sidebar. ● Drag the waveform from the diagram to the sidebar. The waveform disappears from the diagram and the minimized signal view is shown in the signal icon.

  • Page 63: Toolbar

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The diagram layout depends on the position where you drop the signal view, in relation to an existing diagram. Figure 2-7: SmartGrid positions 1 = In the existing diagram, overlay of signal 2 = New diagram on the left or right 3 = New diagram above or below 4 = New diagram on top of the existing diagram 5 = XY-diagram...
  • Page 64 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Some of the toolbar functions are one-click actions. These actions are performed immediately when you tap the icon. Other toolbar functions are analyzing functions. These actions are interactive actions. To use analyzing functions (interactive actions) 1.
  • Page 65 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. Select the required toolbar functions: ● Disable the functions that you do not need. Enable the functions that you want to add to the toolbar. ● To display all available toolbar icons, tap "Show All". ●...
  • Page 66 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument One-click actions Interactive actions Autoset and Preset Delete Run / Stop and Run Single Label Find Trigger Level Update Ref Waveform Force Trigger Save Waveform Spectrogram (option R&S RTP-K37) Zone trigger (option R&S RTP-K19) You can configure the content of the toolbar and hide the date/time display, see Chap- ter 2.3.5.2, "Configuring the...
  • Page 67 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Hardware zoom ← Zoom Changes the instrument settings - horizontal and vertical scales as well as trigger level and offset - to display a part of the diagram in greater detail. Coupled zoom ← Zoom Creates a coupled zoom area and its related zoom diagram.
  • Page 68 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Measurement Starts an automatic measurement. You can run up to 8 automatic measurement groups in parallel. The "Automatic meas- urment" icon starts the measurement groups one after the other. A measurement group consists of minimum one measurement, and can consist of many measurements of the same category.
  • Page 69 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Autoset and Preset Performs an autoset, or a preset to a default state. The icons have the same function- ality as the corresponding keys on the front panel. They are useful when you control the instrument remotely.

  • Page 70: Displaying Results

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2.3.6 Displaying Results The results of automatic and cursor measurements, mask tests, and searches are dis- played immediately in a result box. There are several places to display the results: ● In a floating result box in front of the diagrams, which you can move on the display ●...

  • Page 71: Using Dialog Boxes

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument To define the default position of results 1. Press the [Display] key on the front panel. 2. In the "Display" dialog box, select the "Diagram Layout" tab. 3. Under "Result box", select the "Default position": ●...
  • Page 72 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument ● Tap the required menu, and then the menu entry. ● Press the function key on the front panel. ● If a results box is open, tap the icon to open the corresponding dialog box. ●...

  • Page 73: Entering Data

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2.3.8 Entering Data Most important parameters have their own rotary knobs on the front panel. When you turn a knob, the input box appears the lower right corner of the screen, showing the parameter name and current value.
  • Page 74 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument ● To increase the displayed value in fixed steps, tap "Inc". To decrease the value in fixed steps, tap "Dec". To toggle between small steps and large steps, tap the "Steps" icon. ● To get the value that was used before the keypad was displayed, tap "Cur".

  • Page 75: Messages

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument If you edit numeric data in tables, the entry field must be in edit mode. To activate the edit mode, press ENTER, or the [☑] key, or the navigation rotary knob. 2.3.9 Messages Status messages of the instrument are displayed for a few seconds.
  • Page 76 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The "Help" window opens and displays the comprehensive description and the cor- responding remote command. You can browse the help for further information. Note: The tooltip icon disables automatically when you tap a parameter. To show another tooltip, tap the tooltip icon again.
  • Page 77 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument To search topics for a text string 1. Switch to the "Search" tab. 2. Select the "Keyboard" icon besides the entry field. 3. Enter the string you want to find. If you enter several strings with blanks between, topics containing all words are found (same as AND operator).

  • Page 78: Instrument Setup

    ® Instrument Setup R&S System Setup 3 Instrument Setup You can adapt various instrument settings to your requirements, such as language, dis- play appearance, and assign functions to some keys. The chapter describes also the handling of software options. The following setup procedures are described in other chapters of the documentation: ●...
  • Page 79 ® Instrument Setup R&S System Setup Firmware version......................79 Bios version........................79 Image version........................79 Desktop (minimize all)....................80 Computer name, IP Address, DHCP................80 System.......................... 80 Network......................... 80 Screensaver........................80 Display / Monitors: Display Settings................80 Time, date........................81 Log on as........................81 Language........................81 Select setup for firmware update..................
  • Page 80 ® Instrument Setup R&S System Setup Desktop (minimize all) Minimizes all displayed application windows on the instrument, so that the desktop becomes visible on the screen to access the Windows functionality. This function is also available from the "File" menu. Computer name, IP Address, DHCP Indicates the currently defined computer name, the defined IP address and DHCP address enabling.
  • Page 81 ® Instrument Setup R&S System Setup "Extend" The instrument display and the external display show different con- tent. "Projector The instrument's user interface is only shown on the external display, the instrument display is off. only" "Additional dis- Opens the Windows configuration for display settings. play settings"...

  • Page 82: Setting The Display Language

    ® Instrument Setup R&S System Setup "Explore" Opens the Windows file explorer where you can navigate and search for files and folders as usual. Start internet update Starts the "RTxUpdater", which connects to the internet, checks for newer versions, downloads the firmware file, and installs the firmware. Only users with administrator rights can fulfill this task.

  • Page 83: Screen Setup

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Screen Setup 3.2 Screen Setup ● Screen Settings.......................83 ● Aligning the Touchscreen..................84 3.2.1 Screen Settings Access: [Setup] > "Screen" tab The settings on this tab are related to the screen display. Note for "Dialog configuration", "Front panel setup" and "Navigation rotary knob" set- tings: These settings are user-specific, they are not reset by [Preset] and *RST.

  • Page 84: Aligning The Touchscreen

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Screen Setup Max move range for click Defines the maximum number of pixels around an element (e.g. data point) within which your pointing device must stay to "click" the element. When you tap or click a specific element and move your finger or the mouse outside this range, it is considered to be a "moving"...

  • Page 85: Frontpanel Setup

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Frontpanel Setup 5. Repeat this action for the crosses in the other corners. 6. Tap the R&S logo button in the task bar to display the instrument's user interface. 3.3 Frontpanel Setup In the "Frontpanel Setup" dialog box, you can adjust the luminosity of the screen and luminous keys, assign functions to keys and knobs, and adjust the Navigation knob.
  • Page 86 ® Instrument Setup R&S Frontpanel Setup Print Button........................86 Quick Action........................86 Print Button The Camera key on the left side of the display is a shortcut key that initiates an associ- ated action. You can assign one of the following actions to the Camera key: ●...

  • Page 87: Knobs

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Frontpanel Setup Remote command: on page 1028 QACTion:MODE on page 1029 QACTion:EXECute To run an application: on page 1029 QACTion:PATH on page 1029 QACTion:PARameters on page 1029 QACTion:WDIRectory 3.3.3 Knobs Access: "File" menu > "Frontpanel Setup" > "Knobs" Vertical..........................

  • Page 88: Display Configuration

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration Rotary knob acceleration method Selects a method to accelerate the movement of the element on the screen compared to the actual movement of the rotary knob. Acceleration is useful if you need to move from one end of the screen to the other, for example.

  • Page 89: Display Settings

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration The following default color tables are provided: ● "False colors" ● "M-Hot" ● "M-Hsv" ● "M-Jet" ● "Spectrum" ● "Single Event" ● "Temperature" Dialog boxes and result boxes You can configure the font size, contrast and transparency in dialog and result boxes. Thus, you can optimize readability or keep track of the waveforms while changing set- tings in dialog boxes.
  • Page 90 ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration Enable persistence......................90 Infinite persistence......................90 Persistence time......................90 Reset..........................91 Intensity.........................91 Style..........................91 Color..........................91 Set to default color......................91 Use color table......................92 Source...........................92 Assigned color table......................92 Enable persistence If enabled, each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen for the duration that is defined using Persistence time, or as long as...
  • Page 91 ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration Remote command: on page 1030 DISPlay:PERSistence:TIME Reset Resets the display, removing persistent all waveform points. Remote command: on page 1031 DISPlay:PERSistence:RESet Intensity This value determines the strength of the waveform line in the diagram. Enter a per- centage between 0 (not visible) and 100% (strong).
  • Page 92 ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration Use color table If enabled, the selected waveform is displayed according to its assigned color table. If this option is disabled, the selected color is displayed, and the intensity of the specific signal color varies according to the cumulative occurrence of the values. Remote command: on page 1032 DISPlay:COLor:SIGNal<m>:USE...
  • Page 93 ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration The editing table allows you to edit existing color tables or add new ones that can then be assigned to the waveforms. To assign a color table to a waveform, use the "Signal colors / Persistence" tab. See also: ●...
  • Page 94 ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration On the "Diagram Layout" tab, you define the basic diagram layout and the position of result boxes. These settings are user-specific, they are not reset by [Preset] and *RST. You can reset them to default values using [Save Recall] > "Save/Recall > User defined preset >...

  • Page 95: Show Labels

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration Show labels If selected, labels mark values on the x- and y-axes in specified intervals in the dia- gram. Remote command: on page 1035 DISPlay:DIAGram:LABels Show div label (x) If selected, the time scale value is shown at the diagram bottom instead of the horizon- tal grid labels.

  • Page 96: Show Evaluation Gate(S) In Zoom

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration Show evaluation gate(s) in zoom If enabled, the available histogram areas, masks, and measurement gates are shown in the zoom diagrams. If the evaluation gate is within the zoom area, the display helps to move or modify the evaluation gates in the zoom window. Make sure that the option is disabled if the zoom area and the evaluation gate are of nearly the same size to avoid conflicts in operation.
  • Page 97 ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration 3.4.2.4 Waveform Labels Access: [Display] > "Labels" tab Using labels, you can annotate the waveforms to name or explain each waveform. The text is shown in the same color as the assigned waveform. Each label has its individual position.
  • Page 98 ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration on page 1041 DISPlay:SIGNal:LABel:VERTical:ABSolute:POSition on page 1042 DISPlay:SIGNal:LABel:HORizontal:RELative:POSition on page 1042 DISPlay:SIGNal:LABel:VERTical:RELative:POSition Show labels Enables or disables the label display. Position mode Defines the label position either relative to the diagram or with absolute values accord- ing to the units of the waveform.

  • Page 99: Adjusting The Display

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration this function frequently, you can add the corresponding icon to the toolbar, see Chap- ter 2.3.5.2, "Configuring the Toolbar", on page 64. 3.4.3 Adjusting the Display You can adjust the appearance of several display elements: ●...
  • Page 100 ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration 4. In the "Adjust Colors" dialog box, select a predefined color, or define any other RGB color with "User defined Colors". To edit a color table 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "Color Tables". 2.
  • Page 101 ® Instrument Setup R&S Display Configuration To create a color table 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "Signal Colors". 2. To create an empty color table: tap the "Add" button and enter a name for the new color table using the on-screen keyboard. To copy an existing color table: select the color table you want to copy, and tap the "Copy"...

  • Page 102: External Application

    ® Instrument Setup R&S External Application 2. In the "Screen" tab, in the "Dialog box transparency" field, enter the transparency value for dialog boxes. For high transparency values, you can see the waveform display in the back- ground, and possibly check the effect of the changed setting. For lower transpar- ency values, readability in the dialog box improves.

  • Page 103: Self-Alignment

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Self-alignment 3.6 Self-alignment When data from several input channels is displayed at the same time, it may be neces- sary to align the data vertically or horizontally to synchronize the time bases or ampli- tudes and positions. This is the case, for example, when strong temperature changes occur (>...

  • Page 104: Performing A Self-Alignment

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Self-alignment 3.6.3 Performing a Self-alignment The self-alignment aligns the data from several input channels vertically and horizon- tally to synchronize the timebases, amplitudes and positions. The self-alignment proc- ess includes a basic hardware check. Recommendation on performing the self-alignment: ●...

  • Page 105: Self-Test

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Options 3.7 Self-test The instrument's self-test checks the hardware for correct operation. Perform the self- test if you suspect problems in hardware operation. ► "File" menu > "Selftest". The test can take several minutes. The summary result is shown in the "State" field, which can be helpful in case you need support.

  • Page 106: Sw Options

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Options Unregistered licenses Unregistered licenses are not assigned to a particular instrument. The instrument accepts only registered licenses. If your license is delivered unregistered, use the online tool R&S License Manager to register the license for your instrument. The regis- tration of a permanent license is irreversible, so ensure that you register it for the cor- rect instrument.
  • Page 107 ® Instrument Setup R&S Options The "State" of the option indicates whether the installed option is a normal or a beta- release version. Beta-release versions must be activated explicitly in the "Mode" dialog box (see Chapter 3.9.5, "Options in Beta State", on page 110).

  • Page 108: Hw Options

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Options Export deactivation key When you move a portable license, or deactivate an option, you have to note the response key, or to save the response to a file. The "R&S License Manager" needs the response key. See also Chapter 3.9.4, "Moving a Portable License",...

  • Page 109: Moving A Portable License

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Options 2. If you received a key in written form, enter the key in the "Enter new option key" field. If you received a key in digital form as a file, tap "Open", navigate to the directory that contains the file, and select the option key file.

  • Page 110: Options In Beta State

    ® Instrument Setup R&S Options a) Open the R&S License Manager: https://extranet.rohde-schwarz.com/service. b) Select "Move Portable License". c) Enter the device identifications of the source and target instruments. 4. In the R&S License Manager: a) Open the portable license file of the source instrument, or enter the license key (option key).

  • Page 111: Acquisition And Waveform Setup

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics 4 Acquisition and Waveform Setup This chapter describes the horizontal and vertical settings as well as the acquisition and probe setup. 4.1 Basics This chapter provides background information on the essential settings in the vertical and horizontal systems, on acquisition setup and probing.
  • Page 112 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics Figure 4-1: Input range and resolution of the ADC With R&S RTP, you can work with multiple diagrams, and each diagram obtains the full vertical resolution, no matter where the diagram is placed. Therefore, use a separate diagram for each waveform instead of the traditional setup that arranges the wave- forms side by side in one diagram.

  • Page 113: Sampling And Acquisition

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics Figure 4-3: R&S RTP setup of multiple waveforms in separate diagrams: best resolution 4.1.1.3 Bandwidth For analog applications, the highest signal frequency determines the required oscillo- scope bandwidth. The oscilloscope bandwidth should be slightly higher than the maxi- mum frequency included in the analog test signal to measure the amplitude with very little measurement error.
  • Page 114 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics 4.1.2.1 Sampling and Processing The A/D converter samples the continuous signal under test at specific points in time and delivers digital values called ADC samples. The rate at which the converter is working is the ADC sample rate, a constant value specified in GHz: = 1 / T The digital ADC samples are processed according to the acquisition settings.
  • Page 115 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics Figure 4-4: Waveforms acquired with different sample rates To avoid aliasing, the sample rate must be set to a value 3 to 5 times the fastest fre- quency component of the signal. A higher sample rate increases signal fidelity, increa- ses the chance to capture glitches and other signal anomalies, and improves the zoom-in capabilities.

  • Page 116: Horizontal System

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics of the waveform record is filled. Then it stops acquiring and waits for the next trigger. When a trigger is recognized, the instrument does not accept another trigger until the acquisition is complete. The trigger modes define how the instrument triggers: ●...

  • Page 117: Probes

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics ● With constant record length, increasing the time scale coarsens the resolution, that is, the time between two waveform samples gets longer. For both settings, the "Auto adjustment" ensures a sufficient resolution to prevent undersampling.
  • Page 118 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics ● The connection should not introduce or suppress signal components (hum, noise, filter) and thus degrade or distort the transferred signal. In reality, the probe can never be an ideal one, it always affects the signal transmission and the signal source, and thus the measured signal.
  • Page 119 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics ● Impedance: A minimum impedance is required to keep the circuit loading low. Over frequency, the impedance decreases, in particular with passive probes. The probe impedance should be approximately 10 times the impedance of the circuit test point at the highest signal frequency.
  • Page 120 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Basics A differential probe has three sockets: the positive signal socket (+), the negative sig- nal socket (-), and the ground socket. Multiple input voltages can be defined for a differential probe: ● Differential mode input voltage (V Voltage between the positive and negative signal sockets ●...

  • Page 121: Horizontal Settings

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings 4.2 Horizontal Settings The "Horizontal" menu provides the time base and acquisition configuration for channel and spectrum waveforms: ● Setup........................121 ● Acquisition......................125 ● Fast Segmentation....................129 4.2.1 Setup Access: Horizontal key The "Setup" tab in the "Horizontal" dialog box provides the settings for the time axis and the roll mode.

  • Page 122: Time Scale

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings Time scale Sets the horizontal scale for all channel and math waveforms in seconds per division. Increase the scale to see a longer time interval of the waveform. Decrease the scale to see it in more detail.

  • Page 123: Resolution

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings See also: ● Chapter 4.1.2, "Sampling and Acquisition", on page 113 ● Chapter 4.1.3, "Horizontal System", on page 116 Remote command: on page 1048 ACQuire:SRReal Resolution Sets the time between two waveform samples. A fine resolution with low values produ- ces a more precise waveform record.

  • Page 124: Auto Adjustment (Resolution Dependency)

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings Auto adjustment (Resolution dependency) Prevents undersampling and ensures a sufficient resolution to acquire the correct waveform if the time scale is changed. The setting takes effect if the changed parame- ter - resolution or record length - reaches a limit. The instrument automatically keeps this parameter constant at its limit, and changes the other parameter regardless of the "Resolution / Record length"...

  • Page 125: Acquisition

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings If the acquisition time is >50 s, the record length limit is effective, and the maximum sample rate depends on the acquisition time: ≤ 100 MSa / Acquisition time. Sample rate If the acquisition time is <50 s, the maximum sample rate in roll mode depends on the number of active channels: Sample rate = 2 MSa/s / Number of active wfms.
  • Page 126 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings The acquisition "Mode" and "Waveform arithmetic" are specific for each waveform. Make sure to select the channel tab first, then set up the waveforms. Interpolation........................ 127 Couple channels......................127 Multi waveform......................127 Enable Wfm.........................127 Mode...........................
  • Page 127 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings Interpolation Selects the interpolation method. If the defined "Sample rate" is higher than the ADC sample rate, interpolation adds points between the captured samples of the waveform by various mathematic methods. "Linear" Two adjacent ADC sample points are connected by a straight line, the interpolated points are located on the line.
  • Page 128 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings The decimation mode is waveform-specific, you can select another mode for each waveform. There are different methods to define the recorded waveform point out of n sample points: "Sample" One of n samples in a sample interval of the ADC is recorded as waveform point, the other samples are discarded.

  • Page 129: Fast Segmentation

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings Acquisition/average count Access: ● Trigger > "Control" tab > "Average count (N-single count)" ● [Acquisition] > "Average count" ● [Horizontal] > "Fast Segmentation" tab > disable "Acquire maximum" > "Required" ● [Math] > "Setup" tab > "Average count" The acquisition and average count has several effects: ●...
  • Page 130 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Settings Figure 4-5: Normal acquisition with blind time With fast segmentation, several triggered acquisitions are captured fast, with hardly any dead time between the acquisitions. The data is processed and the waveforms are displayed when the acquisition of the series has been completed.

  • Page 131: Vertical Settings

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Vertical Settings Enable automatic replay If enabled, the instrument starts processing and displaying the data when the acquisi- tion series is captured completely. Depending on the number of acquisitions, it can take some time until the acquisition series is displayed. If the setting is disabled, the instrument only captures the data and stores it in the sample memory.

  • Page 132: Channels

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Vertical Settings 4.3.1 Channels Access: "Vertical" menu > "Channels" The "Channels" tab provides all basic vertical settings. The channels are listed in verti- cal tabs at the left side of the dialog box. You can also filter the signal for high frequency rejection, see Chapter 4.7, "Digital Fil- Setup", on page 175.
  • Page 133 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Vertical Settings Remote command: on page 1055 CHANnel<m>:SCALe Position Moves the selected signal up or down in the diagram. The visual effect is the same as Offset but the waveform is adjusted later in the signal flow. While the offset sets a voltage, position is a graphical setting given in divisions.

  • Page 134: Coupled Channels

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Vertical Settings By default, the horizontal grid axis remains in the center when the offset is changed. To shift the axis together with the waveform, disable Keep Y-grid fixed in "Display > Dia- gram Layout". Remote command: on page 1057 CHANnel<m>:OFFSet...

  • Page 135: High Definition Mode

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S High Definition Mode Show channel Switches the channel signal on or off. The signal icon appears on the sidebar. The waveform of the last acquisition is displayed in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1054 CHANnel<m>:STATe Measurement impedance Sets the impedance of the channel for power calculations and measurements.

  • Page 136: Effects Of The High Definition Mode

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S High Definition Mode Figure 4-7: Setting the instrument into high definition mode Operation mode Sets the operation mode of the instrument. "Normal" Usual oscilloscope mode "High defini- Mode with higher digital resolution, up to 16 bit. tion"...
  • Page 137 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S High Definition Mode Vertical system The current bandwidth is shown in the channel label. In the "Channels" dialog box (CH<x>), the "Bandwidth" setting is not available because the bandwidth is set by the high definition filter. The minimum vertical scale is 500 μV/div instead of 1 mV in normal mode.
  • Page 138 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S High Definition Mode History Due to the 16-bit word length, the history depth is reduced, less waveforms are saved than in normal mode. Export In high definition mode, waveform data in raw format is exported to file with 16-bit word length, except for peak detect decimation (2 values with 8 bit).

  • Page 139: Probes

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes See: ● "Raw (ADC direct)" on page 444 ● "Interleaved x/y" on page 444 ● "Byte order" on page 445 If you use remote control commands to transfer data to a controlling computer, set the data format to INT,16 to transfer the complete data words (see FORMat[:DATA] on page 1021).

  • Page 140: Shared Probe Settings

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes In the "Setup" tab, you find all settings that are relevant for the connected probe. Access: "Vertical" menu > "Probe Setup" The functionality on the "Setup" tab changes according to the type of the attached probe.
  • Page 141 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes The shared probe settings are: Type, Name, Bandwidth....................141 Detect AutoZero, Use AutoZero..................141 External attenuation: Scale, Attenuation..............142 Type, Name, Bandwidth The fields show the characteristics of a recognized or predefined probe for information. If the instrument cannot recognize the probe, and the probe is not known, the "Type"...

  • Page 142: Settings For The R&S Probe Interface (Voltage Probes)

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Remote command: on page 1062 PROBe<m>:SETup:OFFSet:AZERo on page 1062 PROBe<m>:SETup:OFFSet:USEautozero External attenuation: Scale, Attenuation Consider a voltage divider that is part of the DUT before the measuring point. The external attenuation is included in the measurement, and the instrument shows the results that would be measured before the divider.
  • Page 143 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Probe unit, Auto attenuation..................143 Micro button action......................143 ProbeMeter......................... 144 Probe unit, Auto attenuation If the probe is recognized by the R&S RTP, the instrument reads the attenuation unit and value from the probe an displays them. Remote command: on page 1062 PROBe<m>:SETup:ATTenuation[:AUTO]?
  • Page 144 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes "Find trigger Sets the trigger level automatically to 0.5 * (MaxPeak – MinPeak). level" Creates and saves a report using the settings defined in "File" menu "Create report" > "Report Setup". "Probe mode" Only available if a R&S RT-ZM modular probe is connected.

  • Page 145: Setup For Passive Probes

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes The ProbeMeter always measures the common mode and differential voltages. Single-ended voltages are calculated values: + 0.5 * V and V - 0.5 * V Remote command: on page 1065 PROBe<m>:PMETer:VISibility on page 1065 PROBe<m>:SETup:DISPlaydiff on page 1065 PROBe<m>:PMETer:RESults:SINGle?

  • Page 146: Setup For Active Voltage Probes

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes If a passive probe is connected, the probe attenuation is read out and shown in the "Setup" tab: ● "Probe unit, Auto attenuation" on page 143 If you need to change the unit or attenuation, change the "Mode" to "Manual" and enter the correct values.
  • Page 147 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Special features of the Rohde & Schwarz probe interface are described in these sec- tions: ● "Probe unit, Auto attenuation" on page 143 ● "Micro button action" on page 143 ● "ProbeMeter" on page 144 The specific settings of Rohde &...
  • Page 148 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes 4.5.4.2 R&S RT-ZD Differential Probes Figure 4-10: Probe setup for active differential probe R&S RT-ZD30 The offset is the differential offset. See "Offset" on page 133. Specific settings for R&S RT-ZD probes are the following: CM offset Sets the common-mode offset to compensate for a common DC voltage applied to both input sockets (referenced to the ground socket).
  • Page 149 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes 4.5.4.3 R&S RT-ZPR Power Rail Probes Figure 4-11: Probe setup for power rail probe R&S RT-ZPR The offset is the channel offset. See "Offset" on page 133. If the ProbeMeter is active, an additional function is provided in the "ProbeMeter" result box: Figure 4-12: ProbeMeter result box for Specific settings for R&S RT-ZPR probes are the following:...
  • Page 150 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Remote command: on page 1070 PROBe<m>:SETup:ADVanced:PMToffset 4.5.4.4 R&S RT-ZHD High-Voltage Differential Probes Figure 4-13: Probe setup for R&S RT-ZHD probes The offset is the differential offset. See "Offset" on page 133. Specific settings for R&S RT-ZHD probes are the following: Range Sets the voltage range of a R&S RT-ZHD probe.

  • Page 151: Modular Probes

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Buzzer Activates the acoustic overrange warning in the probe control box. You can also acti- vate the sound directly on the probe control box. Remote command: on page 1071 PROBe<m>:SETup:ADVanced:AUDioverload Negative, Positive, Differential Overrange The color turns red if the voltage exceeds the probe range.
  • Page 152 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes ● Setup Parameters of Modular Probes..............152 ● Deembedding for Modular Probes................ 153 ● Termination Voltage (Only with R&S RT-ZMA40 SMA Module)......156 4.5.5.1 Setup Parameters of Modular Probes The basic setup parameters of all modular probes are the measurement mode and the offset settings.
  • Page 153 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes "CM" Common mode input voltage (V ), the mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs. ground. "P" Positive single-ended input voltage (V ). The voltage between the positive input terminal and ground. "N"...
  • Page 154 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Select probe tip module, Pin spacing Selects the tip module that is used for measurement. If R&S RT-ZMA40 is selected, choose also the used submodule: semi-rigid cables or none. For the browser module R&S RT-ZMA30, measure the space between the pins, and select the appropriate value.
  • Page 155 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Consider that most tip modules support the full bandwidth of the probe, but some tip modules have limited bandwidth. If deembedding option R&S RTP-K121 is active, the instrument uses the effective bandwidth that is set in the "Deembedding" > "Setup" dialog box. Remote command: on page 1076 PROBe<m>:DEEMbedding:BANDwidth...
  • Page 156 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Remote command: on page 1077 PROBe<m>:DEEMbedding:LOAD[:TYPE] on page 1934 DEEMbedding<m>:COMPonent<n>:LOAD[:TYPE] on page 1078 PROBe<m>:DEEMbedding:LOAD:FILE on page 1935 DEEMbedding<m>:COMPonent<n>:LOAD:FILE Source impedance Impedance of the DUT. Shows the default source impedance or sets the user-defined constant impedance value.

  • Page 157: Setup For Predefined Probes

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Remote command: on page 1073 PROBe<m>:SETup:TERM:MODE EnableTermination Voltage Activates control of the termination voltage. Remote command: on page 1073 PROBe<m>:SETup:TERM:STATe Adjustment Sets the voltage to be used for termination to DC voltage. Remote command: on page 1074 PROBe<m>:SETup:TERM:ADJust Measurement...
  • Page 158 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Figure 4-14: Probe setup for transmission line probe R&S RT-ZZ80 Figure 4-15: Probe setup for R&S RT-ZD01 Specific settings for predefined probes are the following: Predefined probe......................159 Offset to mean......................159 Line impedance......................159 User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 05...

  • Page 159: Setup For Current Probes

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Predefined probe List of probes that are known to the instrument. The instrument lists only probes that match the instrument coupling and, if connected, also the used adapter. Select the used probe on the list. The corresponding "Vertical unit" and the "Attenua- tion"...
  • Page 160 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Figure 4-16: Probe setup for current probes R&S RT-ZC10 Current probes R&S RT-ZCxxB Current probes R&S RT-ZCxxB have a Rohde & Schwarz probe interface; they are powered and remotely controlled by the oscilloscope. When the probe is connected, demagnetization is performed automatically.
  • Page 161 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes For all current probes, attenuation or gain is shown in the "Setup" tab, and you can set the offset to mean: ● "Probe unit, Auto attenuation" on page 143 ● "Offset to mean" on page 159 Current probes R&S RT-ZCxxB are adjusted by the following functions: DeGauss........................

  • Page 162: Setup For Unknown Probes

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Save to probe Saves the "Zero adjust" value in the probe box. If you connect the probe to another channel or to another R&S RTx oscilloscope, the value is read out again, and you can use the probe without further adjustment.

  • Page 163: Calibration Results

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Remote commands: ● on page 1080 PROBe<m>:ID:SWVersion? ● on page 1081 PROBe<m>:ID:PRDate? ● on page 1081 PROBe<m>:ID:PARTnumber? ● on page 1081 PROBe<m>:ID:SRNumber? ● on page 1081 PROBe<m>:SETup:CAPacitance? ● on page 1082 PROBe<m>:SETup:IMPedance? 4.5.10 Calibration Results The "Calibration Results"...
  • Page 164 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes 1. Connect the R&S RT-Z1M adapter to the channel input. The instrument identifies the adapter. 2. Connect the probe to the adapter. The oscilloscope reads the probe-specific parameters through the adapter. 3. Set up the probe as usual, depending on the type of the connected probe. 4.
  • Page 165 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Probes Coupling 1 MΩ Selects the coupling, which determines what part of the signal is used for waveform analysis and triggering. In addition to coupling, the signal can be filtered for high frequency rejection, see Chapter 4.7, "Digital Filter Setup", on page 175.

  • Page 166: R&S Rt-Zvc Probe

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC Probe "Bandwidth limit": see "Bandwidth limit" on page 164. Selfalignment Self-alignment compensates measurement errors caused by a difference of termina- tion impedance, or an ambient temperature different from the one at which the factory alignment was done.

  • Page 167: R&S Rt-Zvc Overview

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC Probe channel voltmeter. The probe provides parallel measurements of analog or digital, volt- age/current signals with excellent 18-bit resolution. For more information on the R&S RT-ZVC probe, see also its user manual. Source Channels You can simultaneously connect a R&S RT-ZVC and a R&S RT-ZL04 to the R&S RTP, but no parallel operation on screen is possible.
  • Page 168 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC Probe Make sure that the tab of the correct probe is selected on the left side. State Enables the corresponding channel of the probe. The number of available channels depend on the characteristics of your multi-channel power probe. Remote command: on page 1091 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>[:STATe]...
  • Page 169 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC Probe Within a given operation range, modifying the offset is equivalent to moving vertically the display range. The offset can only be modified such that the display range reaches at most the limits of the operation range. For the voltmeter channels, the Scale, the Offset and the "Position"...
  • Page 170 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC Probe Resolution coupled Sets the resolution of all R&S RT-ZVC channels. "On" The resolution of the analog channels is applied to R&S RT-ZVC channels. The signal is automatically interpolated or decimated to get the analog resolution.

  • Page 171: Zvc Voltage Settings

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC Probe Remote command: on page 1092 ZVC:Z<m>:ID:PARTnumber? 4.6.1.3 Power Calculation Access: "Vertical" menu > "ZVC Multi-Channel Probe"> "Power Calculation" tab State Enables the corresponding channel of the probe. The number of available channels depend on the characteristics of your multi-channel power probe.
  • Page 172 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC Probe ● Offset Channel Selects the voltmeter channel to be configured. State Enables the corresponding voltage channel of the probe. The number of available channels depend on the characteristics of your multi-channel power probe. Remote command: on page 1091 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>[:STATe]...

  • Page 173: Zvc Current Settings

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC Probe Reset Overload Resets the overload indication at the probe. Remote command: on page 1090 ZVC:Z<m>:V<n>:OVERload:RSTO 4.6.3 ZVC Current Settings Access: "Vertical" menu > "ZVC Multi-Channel Probe" > "Setup" dialog > "Setup" of current channel See also: ●...
  • Page 174 ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S R&S RT-ZVC Probe Remote command: on page 1084 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:BANDwidth? Position Moves the selected signal up or down in the diagram. The visual effect is the same as for Offset. While the offset sets a current, position is a graphical setting given in divi- sions.

  • Page 175: Digital Filter Setup

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Digital Filter Setup For using internal shunts, the circuit under test needs to be interrupted so that the cur- rent can flow through the probe. Remote command: on page 1088 ZVC:Z<m>:I<n>:SHUNt:MAXCurrent External shunt mode Shunt mode is set to "External shunt", include the settings for the external shunt mode.

  • Page 176: Horizontal Accuracy

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Accuracy If High Definition mode (option R&S RTP-K17) is installed, digital filter settings are enabled automatically. You can change the high definition bandwidth in the "Digital Fil- ter Setup", which is applied to the channels. Use filter Enables the DSP filter for the correspondig input channel.

  • Page 177: Reference Clock (Ocxo)

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Accuracy 4.8.1 Reference Clock (OCXO) Access: "Horizontal" menu > "Skew" > "Reference clock" tab. The oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO) produces a 10 MHz internal reference signal with precise and stable frequency. With OCXO, you can also use an external ref- erence signal.

  • Page 178: Skew

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Accuracy 4.8.2 Skew Skew compensates signal propagation differences between channels caused by the different length of cables, probes, and other sources. Correct skew values are impor- tant for accurate triggering and timing relations between channels. Make sure that the correct channel tab is selected.

  • Page 179: Aux Out

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Horizontal Accuracy "Use probe group delay ..." If enabled, the skew of all connected active probes is measured, dis- played, and used for deskewing. The setting affects all active chan- nels. "Active probe" Shows the type of the probe that is connected to the selected chan- nel.

  • Page 180: Setting Up The Waveform

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Setting Up the Waveform 4.9 Setting Up the Waveform This chapter contains the fundamental procedures for setting up the acquisition and adjusting the channel waveforms. 4.9.1 Adjusting Passive Probes R&S RT-ZP10 passive probes are already pre-compensated to the R&S RTP front-end characteristics, and a compensation procedure is not required.

  • Page 181: Adjusting The Signal Input Manually

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Setting Up the Waveform 4.9.3 Adjusting the Signal Input Manually 1. Connect the probe to the input connector [Ch <n>]. The instrument recognizes the probe and turns on the channel. 2. On the "Horizontal" menu, tap "Setup". 3.

  • Page 182: Starting And Stopping Acquisition

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Setting Up the Waveform 4.9.5 Starting and Stopping Acquisition You can control the acquisition in two ways: ● Running continuous acquisition until you stop it. ● Running one acquisition or a given number of acquisitions. If "Envelope"...

  • Page 183: Using Fast Segmentation

    ® Acquisition and Waveform Setup R&S Setting Up the Waveform 3. In the "Roll mode" section of the "Setup" tab, set "Mode" to "Auto". 4. In the "Min roll mode gain" field, enter the acquisition time at which the instrument starts the roll mode.

  • Page 184: Triggers

    ® Triggers R&S Basics of Triggering 5 Triggers 5.1 Basics of Triggering Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the relevant waveforms. Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in analog, digital, and protocol signals. Trigger A trigger occurs if the complete set of trigger conditions is fulfilled.

  • Page 185: Setting Up The Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Setting Up the Trigger Trigger sequence A complex trigger sequence joins two or more separate trigger conditions with an optional delay time and a reset time or reset condition. Similar setups are also known as multi-step trigger or A/B trigger. Trigger information Information on the most important trigger settings is shown in the trigger label on top of the sidebar.

  • Page 186: Positioning The Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Setting Up the Trigger Proceed as follows: 1. Press the [Trigger] key on the front panel. The "Trigger" dialog box opens with the "Setup" tab. 2. At the left hand-side, select the "A" vertical sub tab. 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the trigger source. 4.

  • Page 187: Setting Up A A → B → R Sequence

    ® Triggers R&S Setting Up the Trigger 3. Enter the "Holdoff settings" belonging to the selected mode. 5.2.4 Setting Up a A → B → R Sequence The complete configuration of a complex "A → B → R" trigger sequence consists of: ●...

  • Page 188: Trigger Types

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types 3. Select the channel(s) with the digital input signal to be used as qualifying signal(s). Channels used as trigger source for the current trigger condition cannot be used for qualification and appear dimmed. 4. Check and set the trigger levels for all used channels, that is, the thresholds for digitization of analog signals.
  • Page 189 ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types The basic trigger settings are the trigger source and the trigger type, including the trig- ger level. These settings are specific for each condition in a trigger sequence "A → B → R". For the trigger source, the current ground/coupling settings are displayed, filtering is also possible.

  • Page 190: Edge

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Type Selects the trigger type specific for each condition in a trigger sequence. The current trigger type is shown on the button. The following trigger types are available: ● Edge, see page 190 ● Glitch, see page 191 ●...

  • Page 191: Glitch

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types The trigger condition is fulfilled when the signal from the trigger source passes the specified threshold voltage in the specified direction (slope). If the trigger source is a channel signal, the edge trigger uses the digitized trigger sig- nal.

  • Page 192: Width

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Polarity Indicates the polarity of a pulse, that is the direction of the first pulse slope. "Positive" Selects positive going pulses. "Negative" Selects negative going pulses. "Either" Selects both positive and negative going pulses. Remote command: on page 1105 TRIGger<m>:GLITch:RANGe on page 1107...
  • Page 193 ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types The width trigger compares the pulse width (duration of a pulse) with a given time limit. It detects pulses with an exact pulse width, pulses shorter or longer than a given time, and pulses inside or outside the allowable time range. The pulse width is measured at the trigger level.

  • Page 194: Runt

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Width For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the width defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits ±Delta. For the ranges "Shorter" and "Longer", the width defines the maximum and minimum pulse width, respectively.
  • Page 195 ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types "Positive" Selects positive going pulses. "Negative" Selects negative going pulses. "Either" Selects both positive and negative going pulses. Remote command: on page 1105 TRIGger<m>:GLITch:RANGe on page 1107 TRIGger<m>:RUNT:POLarity Upper level Sets the upper voltage threshold. Remote command: on page 1108 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>:RUNT:UPPer...

  • Page 196: Window

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types 5.3.6 Window Access: [Trigger] > "Setup" tab > "Type = Window" The window trigger checks the signal run in relation to a "window". The window is formed by the upper and lower voltage levels. The trigger condition is fulfilled, if the waveform enters or leaves the window, or if the waveform stays inside or outside for a time longer or shorter than specified.

  • Page 197: Timeout

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Time condition Selects how the time limit of the window is defined. Time conditioning is available for the vertical conditions "Stay within" and "Stay outside". "Within" Triggers if the signal stays inside or outside the vertical window limits at least for the time Width - Delta and for Width + Delta at the most.

  • Page 198: Interval

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition. You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display (TA or TB on the right edge of the display). The range of the trig- ger level is limited in a way so that always a hysteresis for stable trigger conditions is available.

  • Page 199: Slew Rate

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Trigger level Sets the voltage level for the trigger condition. You can also drag the trigger level marker on the display (TA or TB on the right edge of the display). The range of the trig- ger level is limited in a way so that always a hysteresis for stable trigger conditions is available.
  • Page 200 ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Slope Sets the edge type for the trigger condition. "Positive" Selects the rising edge, that is a positive voltage change. "Negative" Selects the falling edge, that is a negative voltage change. "Both" Selects the rising as well as the falling edge. This option is not availa- ble if the trigger source is the external trigger input.

  • Page 201: Data2Clock

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Remote command: on page 1115 TRIGger<m>:SLEW:RANGe Slew rate For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the slew rate defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits "±Delta". For the ranges "Shorter" and "Longer", the slew rate defines the maximum and mini- mum slew rate limits, respectively.
  • Page 202 ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types "Positive" Rising edge, a positive voltage change. "Negative" Falling edge, a negative voltage change. "Both" Both the rising and the falling edge. Remote command: on page 1117 TRIGger<m>:DATatoclock:CSOurce:EDGE Clock level Sets the voltage level for the clock signal. Both "Clock level" and "Clock edge" define the starting point for calculation of the setup and hold time.

  • Page 203: State

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types 5.3.11 State The state trigger is a qualified edge trigger. It combines the edge trigger settings with trigger qualification. The individual settings are: ● "Slope" on page 191 ● "Pattern" on page 203 ● "Trigger Levels" on page 204 ●...
  • Page 204 ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types "Channel" Select the channels to be considered. For qualification, you can select all channel signals except for the trigger source. In pattern trig- ger setup, the trigger source channel is selected by default, and you can select all other channel signals.

  • Page 205: Tv/Video Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types These trigger levels are also used in qualification setup. You can set the trigger levels for all channels to the same value, see "Couple levels (Trigger level and hysteresis coupling)" on page 202. Additional settings: Timing "Timing"...
  • Page 206 ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Most video signals have an output impedance of 75 Ω. The channel inputs of the R&S RTP have an input impedance of 50 Ω. Make sure to provide the adequate matching to ensure amplitude fidelity. Once the trigger is set correctly, you can use cursor and automatic measurements to perform amplitude and timing measurements.
  • Page 207 ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types HDTV standards are indicated by the number of active lines, the scanning system (p for progressive scanning, i for interlaced scanning) and the frame rate. For interlaced scanning, the field rate is used instead of the frame rate. 1080p/24sF is an HDTV stan- dard using progressive segmented frame scanning.
  • Page 208 ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Remote command: on page 1101 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>[:VALue] Signal polarity Sets the polarity of the signal. Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity, for example, a positive signal has a negative sync pulse. Figure 5-2: Signal with positive polarity and tri-level sync pulse Remote command: on page 1123 TRIGger<m>:TV:POLarity...

  • Page 209: Line Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Trigger Types Line period This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom". Remote command: on page 1125 TRIGger<m>:TV:CUSTom:LDURation Pulse width Sets the width of the sync pulse. Pulse width This setting is available for user-defined video signals if "Standard" is set to "Custom". Remote command: on page 1126 TRIGger<m>:TV:CUSTom:SDURation...

  • Page 210: Triggering On Serial Buses

    ® Triggers R&S Qualification source if you want to analyze signals related to the power line frequency, such as light- ing equipment and power supply devices. Slope Selects the rising or falling edges of the AC power input for the trigger condition. Remote command: on page 1126 TRIGger<m>:POWerline:SLOPe...
  • Page 211 ® Triggers R&S Qualification Pattern The pattern contains the channel selection, and the logical operations structure of hardware-based Boolean logic. "Channel" Select the channels to be considered. For qualification, you can select all channel signals except for the trigger source. In pattern trig- ger setup, the trigger source channel is selected by default, and you can select all other channel signals.

  • Page 212: Holdoff

    ® Triggers R&S Holdoff Trigger Levels Define the trigger level for each input channel. For state and pattern trigger, the trigger level is a decision threshold: If the signal value is higher than the trigger level, the sig- nal state is high (1 or true for the Boolean logic). Otherwise, the signal state is consid- ered low (0 or false) if the signal value is below the trigger level.

  • Page 213: Noise Reject

    ® Triggers R&S Noise Reject "Time" Defines the holdoff directly as a time period. The next trigger occurs only after the "Holdoff time" has passed. "Events" Defines the holdoff as a number of trigger events. The next trigger only occurs when this number of events is reached. The number of triggers to be skipped is defined in "Holdoff events".
  • Page 214 ® Triggers R&S Noise Reject Hysteresis mode Selects how the hysteresis is set. "Auto" This is the recommended mode. The hysteresis is set by the instru- ment to reject the internal noise of the instrument. "Manual" The hysteresis is defined directly in absolute or relative values. Remote command: on page 1133 TRIGger<m>:LEVel<n>:NOISe[:STATe]...

  • Page 215: Control / Action

    ® Triggers R&S Control / Action Noise reject (external trigger) Enables the noise reject for the external trigger input. Remote command: on page 1135 TRIGger<m>:ANEDge:NREJect 5.7 Control / Action Access: [Trigger] > "Ctrl/Action" tab The settings and functions of trigger control define when the instrument triggers. They affect all trigger types and all triggers in a trigger sequence.
  • Page 216 ® Triggers R&S Control / Action "Auto" The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trigger conditions are not fulfilled. If a real trigger occurs, it takes prece- dence. This mode helps to see the waveform even before the trigger conditions are set correctly.
  • Page 217 ® Triggers R&S Control / Action Remote command: on page 1139 TRIGger<m>:FORCe [Run Stop]/[Single] Front panel keys to start and stop a continuous acquisition or a defined number of acquisition cycles, respectively. The number of acquisitions is set with "Average count". Remote command: on page 1043 on page 1044...

  • Page 218: Sequence

    ® Triggers R&S Sequence "Print" Saves a screenshot according to settings in "File" menu > "Print Setup". "Save Wfm" Saves the waveform data to a file according to settings in [Save Recall] > "Waveform / Results" > "Waveforms". "Report" Creates and saves a report using the settings defined in "File" menu >...

  • Page 219: B-Trigger Setup

    ® Triggers R&S Sequence A OR B The trigger sequence "A OR B" consists of two independent conditions: A-trigger and B-trigger. The instrument triggers if one of the two conditions is fulfilled. A- and B-trig- gers are configured in the same way. The "A OR B"...
  • Page 220 ® Triggers R&S Sequence Couple trigger levels Sets the trigger levels to the values of the current trigger condition. Each channel has its own trigger level. Example: If the "A" tab is selected in the "Setup" tab, and the trigger level for C1 is 70 mV, the coupling sets the trigger levels for C1 in the B- and R trigger conditions also to 70 mV.

  • Page 221: R-Trigger Setup

    ® Triggers R&S Zone Trigger (Option R&S RTP-K19) 5.8.2 R-Trigger Setup The reset condition R can be a timeout or a trigger condition, or a combination of both. Reset timeout / Timeout If timeout is enabled, the instrument waits for the "Timeout" time for the specified num- ber of B-triggers.

  • Page 222: About Trigger Zones

    ® Triggers R&S Zone Trigger (Option R&S RTP-K19) You can use the zone trigger, for example, to solve the following tasks: ● Trigger if a peak in the spectrum occurs, define a zone in the FFT diagram to filter amplitude peaks. In the same way, you can filter harmonics. ●...

  • Page 223: Creating Trigger Zones

    ® Triggers R&S Zone Trigger (Option R&S RTP-K19) 5.9.2 Creating Trigger Zones You can define the trigger zones on the display, or use existing mask definitions as trig- ger zones. Define trigger zones 1. Tap the "Zone trigger" icon on the toolbar. 2.

  • Page 224: Advanced Setup And Analysis With Zone Trigger

    ® Triggers R&S Zone Trigger (Option R&S RTP-K19) Intersect Defines if the signal must intersect the zone to allow the instrument to trigger, or if it must not intersect the zone. Combine Sets the logic combination of two zones. Use selected mask Includes the selected zone or mask in the zone expression.

  • Page 225: External Trigger Input

    ® Triggers R&S External Trigger Input Logical trigger condition If all required mask tests and zones are defined, you can type the logical expression directly, or use the trigger condition editor. All logical combinations are available in the editor. To express the "Must Not Intersect" condition, use the logic NOT. Remote command: on page 1141 TRIGger<m>:ZONE:EXPRession[:DEFine]...

  • Page 226: Probe Setup: Extern Tab

    ® Triggers R&S External Trigger Input ger input, which is equipped with the Rohde & Schwarz probe interface. Thus, you can use all Rohde & Schwarz probes to connect the external trigger signal. The only trigger type to trigger on external signals is the edge trigger. 1.

  • Page 227: External Trigger Setup

    ® Triggers R&S External Trigger Input Remote commands: ● on page 1142 TRIGger<m>:EXTern:OVERload ● on page 1081 TRPRobe:ID:PARTnumber? ● on page 1061 TRPRobe:SETup:STATe? ● on page 1061 TRPRobe:SETup:TYPE? ● on page 1078 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation:DEFProbe ● on page 1068 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation:MANual ● on page 1068 TRPRobe:SETup:ATTenuation:MODE ●...
  • Page 228 ® Triggers R&S External Trigger Input Ground If the selected trigger source is the external trigger input, you can connect the trigger input to the ground. Remote command: on page 1104 TRIGger<m>:ANEDge:GND Coupling 50 Ω The external trigger input is a direct connection with 50 Ω termination, which passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal.

  • Page 229: Acquisition Info

    ® Triggers R&S Acquisition Info "Both" Selects the rising as well as the falling edge. This option is not availa- ble if the trigger source is the external trigger input. Remote command: on page 1102 TRIGger<m>:EDGE:SLOPe on page 1104 TRIGger<m>:ANEDge:SLOPe on page 1114 TRIGger<m>:SLEW:SLOPe Trigger level...

  • Page 230: Waveform Analysis

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom 6 Waveform Analysis This chapter describes general methods to check and analyze waveforms. These are: ● Zoom........................230 ● Reference Waveforms..................242 ● Mathematics......................249 ● History........................264 ● XY-Diagram......................270 6.1 Zoom The zoom functions allow you to magnify a specific section of the diagram in order to view more details.
  • Page 231 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom Figure 6-1: Numeric zoom using start and stop values – Specifying the x- and y-position of the centerpoint of the area plus a range for the x- and y-axes; the area defined by that centerpoint and the ranges is zoomed.

  • Page 232: Zoom Settings

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom 6.1.2 Zoom Settings The zoom area, i.e. the section to be enlarged, can be defined using two different methods: ● Using the zoom functions on the toolbar and draw the zoom area on the touch- screen ●...
  • Page 233 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom 6.1.2.2 Start and Stop Settings The "Start/Stop" tab allows you to specify start and stop values for the x- and y-axes. The acquired data within these ranges is zoomed. Selected diagram Indicates which of the waveform diagrams is selected for zooming. Zoom overlay Shows all zooms of a diagram in one zoom window.
  • Page 234 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom Remote command: on page 1150 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:RELative:STARt on page 1148 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:ABSolute:STARt Full height Uses the full diagram height for the zoom area. Only horizontal zoom settings can be changed. Position coupling Enables or disables the position coupling of coupled zooms. If position coupling is enabled and you move one zoom area, the other coupled zoom areas are moved, too, and keep their distance.
  • Page 235 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom Vertical Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the y-axis values. Remote command: on page 1148 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:MODE on page 1317 SEARch:RESDiagram:VERT:MODE Position / Relative position (vertical) Defines the y-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area. Remote command: on page 1148 LAYout:ZOOM:VERTical:ABSolute:POSition...

  • Page 236: Zooming For Details

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom Remote command: on page 1144 LAYout:ZOOM:POSCoupling Horizontal Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the x-axis values. Remote command: on page 1145 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:MODE on page 1315 SEARch:RESDiagram:HORZ:MODE Position / Relative position (horizontal) Defines the x-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area.
  • Page 237 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom While you drag your finger on the touchscreen, a dotted rectangle indicates the current zoom area. When the rectangle covers the required zoom area, remove your finger. The indicated area is magnified in a new zoom diagram. The original diagram is displayed with the zoom area indicated as a rectangle.
  • Page 238 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom If the rectangle area is too small to select by tapping, press the CHECKMARK key in the navigation area to toggle between area adjustment and edge adjustment modes. 5. Touch the edge that you want to move, and drag it to the required position. To optimize the zoom definition of an active zoom diagram, double-tap the zoom dia- gram.
  • Page 239 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom To define the zoom area numerically using start-stop values 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "Zoom". 2. Select the Start and Stop Settings tab. 3. Under "Vertical mode", select whether you want to define absolute or relative y-axis values.
  • Page 240 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom To define multiple zoom areas graphically, simply repeat the steps described in define the zoom area graphically on the touchscreen - for each area. Numerically, pro- ceed as follows: 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "Zoom". 2.
  • Page 241 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Zoom To define coupled zoom areas You can define multiple zoom areas for one diagram that are coupled. If you change the size of one zoom area, the size of all coupled zoom areas is changed as well. Fur- thermore, you can couple also the position in order to move all coupled zooms at once.

  • Page 242: Reference Waveforms

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Reference Waveforms Note: You can combine hardware zoom and normal zoom - first use the hardware zoom, then the zoom into the display. The reverse approach is also possible: Cre- ate a zoom diagram, and then apply the hardware zoom to the waveform diagram. Both the waveform and the zoom diagrams are changed.
  • Page 243 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Reference Waveforms a) In the "Reference" tab, tap the "Selected source" icon and select a source from the selection list. The source can be any active signal, math, or other reference waveform. b) Tap the "Update with" button to update the current reference waveform with the source data.

  • Page 244: Settings For Reference Waveforms

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Reference Waveforms To view a reference waveform ► You can view a reference waveform, using the "Graphical Recall" function. For details, see: Chapter 11.1.3, "Graphical Recall Function", on page 430. 6.2.2 Settings for Reference Waveforms To compare waveforms and analyze differences between waveforms, you can use up to four reference waveforms R1 to R4.
  • Page 245 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Reference Waveforms Source Selects the source waveform from the active waveforms of input channels, math sig- nals and other reference waveforms. Remote command: on page 1151 REFCurve<m>:SOURce Update with selected source Copies the selected source waveform with all its settings to the memory of the refer- ence waveform.
  • Page 246 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Reference Waveforms 6.2.2.2 Original Attributes As a reference waveform can be scaled, stretched and positioned in the diagram, this tab shows the settings of the original reference waveform for information. ● "Time scale" on page 122 ●...
  • Page 247 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Reference Waveforms Vertical Scaling Selects the type of vertical settings: "Coupled to Vertical position and scale of the source are used. source" "Independent" Scaling and position can be set specific to the reference waveform. Remote command: on page 1153 REFCurve<m>:VMODe Vertical scale...
  • Page 248 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Reference Waveforms Enable ← Vertical Stretching If enabled, the vertical offset and stretching factor are applied to the reference wave- form. Remote command: on page 1154 REFCurve<m>:RESCale:VERTical:STATe Factor ← Vertical Stretching A factor greater than 1 stretches the waveform vertically, a factor lower than 1 com- presses the curve.

  • Page 249: Mathematics

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics Offset ← Horizontal Stretching Moves the waveform horizontally. Enter a value with a time unit suitable for the time scale of the diagram. Positive values shift the waveform to the right, negative values shift it to the left. Remote command: on page 1156 REFCurve<m>:RESCale:HORizontal:OFFSet...

  • Page 250: Math Setup - General Settings

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics ● Chapter 6.3.4, "Advanced Expressions", on page 255 ● Chapter 8.1.2, "Configuring Spectrum Waveforms", on page 355 3. In the "Math Setup" dialog box, in the "Setup" tab, tap the "Enable math signal". The math waveform is displayed on the screen. 4.
  • Page 251 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics The general settings for enabling, scaling and waveform arithmetic are: Enable Math Signal..................... 251 Vertical Scale......................251 └ Vertical scaling mode (Manual/Auto)............251 └ Vertical Scale....................251 └ Vertical Offset....................252 Arithmetic........................252 └ Mode......................252 └...
  • Page 252 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics Vertical Offset ← Vertical Scale Sets a voltage offset to adjust the vertical position of the math function on the screen. Negative values move the waveform , positive values move it down. If the "Vertical scaling mode (Manual/Auto)" on page 251 is set to "Auto", this setting is read-only.

  • Page 253: Basic Editor

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics Thus, the instrument acquires sufficient waveforms to calculate the correct average if "Average" is enabled for waveform arithmetic. The higher the value is, the better the noise is reduced. ● It sets the number of acquisitions to be acquired in a fast segmentation acquisition series.
  • Page 254 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics 6.3.3.1 Settings in the Basic Editor Source 1 / 2.........................254 Operator........................254 Noise reject......................... 254 b..........................255 Envelope wfm selection....................255 Source 1 / 2 Defines the signal source to be evaluated by the math function. Waveform 1 of channel signals can be selected.

  • Page 255: Advanced Expressions

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics a / b Defines the values for the "Rescale" function (ax+b). "a" Is the factor the signal source is multiplied with. "b" Is the offset of the signal source on the y-axis. Envelope wfm selection Selects the upper or lower part of the waveform for mathematic calculation, or a combi- nation of both.
  • Page 256 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics 6.3.4.1 Advanced Formula Editor Using the formula editor you can define math functions freely, using a large selection of operators and signal sources. For a procedure on using the editor, see Chap- ter 6.3.4.2, "Defining a Formula in the Advanced Formula Editor", on page 261.
  • Page 257 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression subtraction addition 0...9 numeric characters decimal point exponentiation with base 10 Enter expression complete insert expression in Setup dialog and close the formula editor Clear clear expression in editor restart editing Delete remove selected part of expression Back...
  • Page 258 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression exponentiation with base e exp(x) ∫xdx integral of x integral(x) d/dx derivation of x derivation(x,y) with x = waveform and y = number of skipped sam- ples (noise reject) ax+b scaling of x rescale(x,a,b) Table 6-5: Bit operations...
  • Page 259 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics Table 6-8: Trigonometry ("More" keys) Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEditor expression sinh hyperbolic sine sinh(x) cosh hyperbolic cosine cosh(x) tanh hyperbolic tangent tanh(x) Table 6-9: Correlation ("More" keys) Icon Description Usage/Comment, FormulaEdi- tor expression Cross correlation function of two waveforms correlation(x1, x2, biased) Measures the similarity of two waveforms as a function correlation(x1, x2, unbiased)
  • Page 260 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics Equation 6-2: Unbiased correlation Mathematic background for auto correlation: Equation 6-3: Biased auto correlation Equation 6-4: Unbiased auto correlation The R&S RTP uses only the real part of the signal. Table 6-10: Filter and power ("More" keys) Icon Description Usage, comment, FormulaEditor expression...
  • Page 261 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics Icon Description Usage, comment, FormulaEditor expression Characteristics of FIR filter gaussian or rectangle, see FIR filter Moving average Calculates a mean value of several adjacent sample points. The result is a smoothed waveform. The moving average uses the full data and can be used for non-peri- odic signals.

  • Page 262: Filters

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics e) Insert a comma using the "," key. Insert the "b" value, i.e. the scaling offset, using the number keys. g) Insert the closing bracket using the ")" key. The resulting expression could be, for example: rescale(Ch1Wfm1,3,4) 6.3.5 Filters The R&S RTP provides several ways to filter the input signal: ●...
  • Page 263 ® Waveform Analysis R&S Mathematics Cut-off frequency for highpass FIR filter To check limit frequency for the highpass filter, convert it to an equivalent lowpass fre- quency: f_LP = f_a_in/2 - f_HP Where f_HP is the requested highpass limit frequency and f_LP the equivalent lowpass frequency that has to comply with the limits given above.

  • Page 264: History

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S History FIR(userdef,Ch1,"C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\RTx\bandpass.csv") 6.4 History The history accesses the data of previous acquisitions and provides them for further analysis. 6.4.1 About History If a continuous acquisition runs, the captured data is stored in the sample memory and the current acquisition is processed and shown on the display.

  • Page 265: History Setup

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S History Quick-access History dialog box When you press the [History] key on the front panel or tap "Display" menu > "Show his- tory", the history mode is enabled and the quick-access "History" dialog box is dis- played.
  • Page 266 ® Waveform Analysis R&S History Remote command: on page 1164 CHANnel<m>[:WAVeform<n>]:HISTory[:STATe] Current acq Accesses a particular acquisition in the memory to display it, or to save it. The newest acquisition always has the index "0". Older acquisition have a negative index. If a history replay is running, the field shows the number of the currently shown acquisi- tion.
  • Page 267 ® Waveform Analysis R&S History Replay time per acq. Sets the display time for one acquisition. The shorter the time, the faster the replay is. The setting takes effect for history replay and the display of a Fast Segmentation ser- ies, see Chapter 4.2.3, "Fast Segmentation",...

  • Page 268: Using History

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S History Available acquisitions Displays the number of acquisitions currently saved in the sample memory. This mem- ory is also used to save a Fast Segmentation acquisition series, so the number of acquisitions available for history viewing is the same as the number of acquisitions in a Fast Segmentation acquisition series.
  • Page 269 ® Waveform Analysis R&S History The quick-access dialog box is displayed. 3. Drag the slider to the required acquisition. The current number is shown in the "Current index" field. Alternatively, enter the number of the required acquisition in the "Current index" field.

  • Page 270: Xy-Diagram

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S XY-Diagram 5. If you want to save only a part of each waveform, set the "Scope". For settings, see "Scope" on page 442. 6. Enable "Export history". 7. If you want to write the timestamps into the data file, enable "Timestamps". 8.
  • Page 271 ® Waveform Analysis R&S XY-Diagram You can display up to four different XY-diagrams that use the voltage level of a wave- form as the x-axis, rather than a time base. Make sure to select the tab of the required XY-diagram. Enable If activated, the XY-waveform is active and shown in a diagram, or it is minimized in a signal icon.

  • Page 272: Displaying An Xy-Diagram

    ® Waveform Analysis R&S XY-Diagram Y-source Defines the source to be used as the y-axis of the XY-diagram. Select one of the fol- lowing: ● One of the waveforms of any channel ● A reference waveform ● The results of a mathematical function Remote command: on page 1170 WAVeform<m>:XYCurve:YSOurce...
  • Page 273 ® Waveform Analysis R&S XY-Diagram The diagram is converted into an XY-diagram. To set up an XY-diagram 1. On the "Display" menu, tap "XY-diagram". 2. Activate the "State" option. 3. In the "X-source" field, define the signal source that supplies the x-values of the XY-diagram.

  • Page 274: Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements 7 Measurements Using the R&S RTP you can perform and display different measurements simultane- ously, based on the active signal or math waveforms. The color of the results in the result table corresponds with the source waveform color. The following measurement methods are available: ●...
  • Page 275 ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements For details on using the result box, see Chapter 2.3.6, "Displaying Results", on page 70 and "Result position" on page 282. 7.1.1.1 Cursor Measurements on Time-Based Waveforms The cursor for measurement on time-based waveforms returns the following results. The results are displayed automatically when a cursor measurement is enabled.

  • Page 276: Using Cursors

    ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements 7.1.2 Using Cursors Cursor measurements can be started simply by using the "Cursor" icon on the toolbar. For detailed configuration, use the "Cursor" dialog box. ● Starting a Simple Cursor Measurement..............276 ● Configuring a Cursor Measurement..............
  • Page 277 ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements ► You can adjust the basic settings of an active cursor measurement in the sidebar: cursor type, source, positions, and track. To open the sidebar, tap the icon in the result box. 1. To open the "Cursors" dialog box, use one of these ways: ●...
  • Page 278 ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements b) To position the horizontal cursors automatically, select "Track waveform". In this case, cursor 1 indicates the current maximum, cursor 2 indicates the current minimum. If both horizontal and vertical cursors are displayed, the hori- zontal cursors are placed at the crossing points of the vertical cursors with the waveform.

  • Page 279: Settings For Cursor Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements 6. Select "Show labels". 7.1.3 Settings for Cursor Measurements Cursor measurements are configured in the "Cursors" dialog box. 7.1.3.1 Cursor Setup Access: [Cursor] key The "Setup" tab contains the settings for cursor measurements. If you want to save the measurement results to a file, tap "Result export".
  • Page 280 ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements Cursor set (vertical tab) The settings for each cursor measurement (or cursor set) are configured on separate tabs. For each measurement, a horizontal pair of cursors, a vertical pair of cursors, or both can be displayed. Enable Enables the selected cursor measurement.
  • Page 281 ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements Remote command: on page 1173 CURSor<m>:USSource on page 1172 CURSor<m>:SSOurce X position 1|2 Defines the position of the vertical cursors. Remote command: on page 1173 CURSor<m>:X1Position on page 1173 CURSor<m>:X2Position Y user position 1|2 Defines the position of the horizontal cursor lines. The setting corresponds to the V1 and V2 values in the "Cursor Results"...
  • Page 282 ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements "Minimum" The horizontal cursor is set to the crossing point of the vertical cursor with the minimum waveform envelope. "Maximum" The horizontal cursor is set to the crossing point of the vertical cursor with the maximum waveform envelope. Remote command: on page 1175 CURSor<m>:X1ENvelope...
  • Page 283 ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements Show in all diagrams Shows the enabled cursor measurements in all active diagrams of the same (time/ spectrum) domain. Remote command: on page 1176 CURSor<m>:SIAD 7.1.3.3 Peak Search The settings on this tab are only available in spectrum mode, i.e. the source of the cur- sor measurement is an FFT math waveform.
  • Page 284 ® Measurements R&S Cursor Measurements If "Peak excursion" is 30 dB, the peaks 1 to 5 are found. If "Peak excursion" is 20 dB, also the peaks 6 to 10 are found. The cursor position is on peak 6. Remote command: on page 1180 CURSor<m>:PEXCursion on page 1205...

  • Page 285: Automatic Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Remote command: on page 1179 CURSor<m>:MAXimum:LEFT Cursor to center Sets the vertical cursor line C1 to the center frequency. Remote command: on page 1179 CURSor<m>:FFT:TOCenter Center to cursor Sets the center frequency to the frequency value that is measured at cursor line C1. Remote command: on page 1179 CURSor<m>:FFT:SETCenter...

  • Page 286: Measurement Setup In General

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements ● Histogram: measurements on histograms Details on automatic measurements are described in the following chapters: ● Measurement Setup in General................286 ● Measurement Results................... 291 ● Measurement Gates....................295 ● Reference Levels....................298 ● Amplitude/Time Measurements................308 ●...
  • Page 287 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements 4. Define the measurement range in one of these ways: ● To measure the complete waveform, tap the diagram with the waveform. ● To define a gate that limits the measurement, draw a rectangle on the screen. The "Meas Results"...
  • Page 288 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements 2. Select the vertical subtab for the measurement group that you want to configure. 3. Select the measurement "Category", for example, "Amp/Time". 4. Tap "Source" and select the waveform to be measured. Spectrum measurements require an FFT math waveform as measurement source. Histogram measurements require a histogram as source.
  • Page 289 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements 11. "Enable" the measurement group. The measurement results are displayed by default below the waveform diagram. 7.2.1.3 General Measurement Settings Automatic measurements are configured in the "Measurements" dialog box. Access: "Meas" menu > "Meas Group" This section describes the settings that relate to all measurements.

  • Page 290: Histogram: Measurements On Histograms

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Category Measurement category. The following categories are available: Time domain: ● Amp/Time: amplitude and time measurements ● Eye: eye diagram measurements ● Histogram: measurements on histograms ● Jitter measurements (only available if option R&S RTP-K12 is installed) Frequency domain ●...

  • Page 291: Measurement Results

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Statistics / Enable Enables the calculation and display of statistical results. Remote command: on page 1222 MEASurement<m>:STATistics[:ENABle] 7.2.2 Measurement Results By default, the results of automatic measurements are displayed below the waveform diagram when an automatic measurement is enabled. If you want to save space in the display, drag the results to the sidebar.
  • Page 292 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements You can display auxiliary result lines and reference levels in the source diagram, Chapter 7.2.2.2, "Configuring the Results Display", on page 292. Remote commands: ● on page 1187 MEASurement<m>:ARES? ● on page 1188 MEASurement<m>:ARNames ● on page 1188 MEASurement<m>:RESult[:ACTual]? ●...
  • Page 293 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements The display settings for measurements are provided on the "Gate/Display" tab, see Chapter 7.2.2.3, "Display Settings for Results", on page 293. To display measurement information and results You can display auxiliary lines in the diagram to determine how a measurement result was obtained.
  • Page 294 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Gate settings are described in Chapter 7.2.3.2, "Gate Settings for Measurements", on page 296. Display result lines Displays intermediate result lines in the measurement waveform (e.g. signal thresh- olds) required to obtain the measurement result. Remote command: on page 1220 MEASurement<m>:DISPlay:RESults...

  • Page 295: Measurement Gates

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Figure 7-4: Left: Grouped and docked results. Right: Ungrouped, floating results The setting affects all measurements except for the peak list. Remote command: on page 1220 MEASurement<m>:DISPlay:GROuping Default position Defines the default position of the result table: ●...
  • Page 296 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements ● If a zoom area has already been defined for the waveform, couple the gate area to the zoom area by selecting the "Zoom coupling" option. ● If a cursor measurement has already been defined for the waveform, couple the gate area to the cursor lines by selecting the "Cursor coupling"...
  • Page 297 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements If several zoom diagrams are defined, select the zoom diagram to be used for gating. The "Start" and "Stop" values of the gate are adjusted accordingly. Zoom coupling can be set for measurement gates, FFT gates, and search gates. Remote command: on page 1230 MEASurement<m>:GATE:ZCOupling...

  • Page 298: Reference Levels

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements on page 1229 MEASurement<m>:GATE:RELative:STOP on page 1311 SEARch:GATE:ABSolute:STOP on page 1312 SEARch:GATE:RELative:STOP Use gate coupling If you enable the gate coupling, the gate settings of the selected measurement are copied to all other measurements. Thus, all measurements use the same gate. If zoom or cursor coupling is active in a measurement, the zoom size and cursor positions are adjusted.
  • Page 299 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements determine zero-crossings. Period, frequency, and pulse measurements are based on hysteresis - the instrument returns results if the amplitude of the signal exceeds the hysteresis. Thus, measurement during the transient oscillation is also possible. Tubes define evaluation ranges for measurements that require detection of the high level or low level.
  • Page 300 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements 4. Under "Level definition", select whether you want to define the levels using abso- lute or relative values. 5. Under "User level selection", select whether you want to configure the high and low signal levels ("User signal level") or the lower, middle and upper reference levels ("User reference level").
  • Page 301 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements To display reference levels and result lines 1. On the "Meas" menu, select "Gate/Display". 2. Select the tab for the measurement you want to configure. 3. Enable "Display result lines" or "Display reference levels" option, or both. The reference levels and intermediate results are displayed in the waveform dia- gram.
  • Page 302 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Figure 7-6: Manual reference level mode, relative level definition In manual reference level mode with absolute level definition, you define the absolute values of high and low signal levels or reference levels, and the distances between ref- erence and signal levels.
  • Page 303 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Reference level mode Defines whether the reference level is configured manually or automatically. Remote command: on page 1234 REFLevel<m>:LDETection Signal level mode Defines the computation method for high and low signal levels. The instrument ana- lyzes the signal, performs amplitude and histogram measurements, and defines the signal levels using the selected method.
  • Page 304 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements "User signal You can define the high and low signal levels. level" You can define the reference levels. "User refer- ence level" Remote command: on page 1236 REFLevel<m>:USRLevel Relative levels Sets the lower, middle and upper reference levels, defined as percentages of the signal amplitude.
  • Page 305 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Middle For user signal level selection, the level is the middle level between high and low signal level. The value is adjusted automatically if you change the high or low signal levels. Vice versa, if you change the middle level, the high and low signal levels are adjusted. For user reference level selection, the level is the middle level between upper and lower reference level.
  • Page 306 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements 7.2.4.3 Hysteresis Tab Access: "Meas" menu > "Reference Level" > "Hysteresis" tab. This tab allows you to define a hysteresis for measurements that determine zero-cross- ings. For a description of settings under "Selection", see Chapter 7.2.4.2, "Level Settings", on page 301.
  • Page 307 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements For a description of settings under "Selection", see Chapter 7.2.4.2, "Level Settings", on page 301. Top outer Defines an area above the high signal level which is still considered to be high level. Remote command: on page 1243 REFLevel<m>:ABSolute:TOTube on page 1246...

  • Page 308: Amplitude/Time Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Remote command: on page 1243 REFLevel<m>:RELative:OTUBe Relative inner Defines a percentage of the signal level by which the absolute signal level may be higher than the low signal level or lower than the high signal level to be considered low or high, respectively.
  • Page 309 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Amplitude Measurements Table 7-1: Amplitude measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result High High signal level High Low signal level Amplitude Amplitude of the signal: the difference of high and low signal lev- Ampl Ampl High Absolute maximum value of the waveform Absolute minimum value of the waveform Peak to peak Peak-to-peak value of the waveform: the difference of maximum...
  • Page 310 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Cycle RMS The RMS (root mean square) value of one cycle Cycle σ (S-dev) The standard deviation of one cycle σ Trig. ProbeMeter The DC voltage from the connected probe. Only available if an active Rohde &...
  • Page 311 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Frequency Frequency of the signal, reciprocal value of the period. Period = 1 / T Period Period Pos. duty cycle Positive duty cycle: Width of a positive pulse in relation to the PosCyc period in %.
  • Page 312 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Pulse train Duration of N positive pulses, measured from the rising edge of the first pulse to the falling edge of the N-th pulse. Define N for the measurement. Setup Setup and Hold time measurement with positive and/or negative Setup clock edge.
  • Page 313 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Table 7-4: Counting measurements Meas. type Symbol Description/Result Pulse count The number of positive or negative pulses of the waveform, or of both positive and negative pulses. The mean value of the signal is determined. If the signal passes the mean value, an edge is counted.
  • Page 314 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements This chapter explains all settings for amplitude/time measurements. For a description of available measurement, see Chapter 7.2.5.1, "Overview of Amplitude/Time Mea- surements", on page 308. Signal threshold......................314 Area level........................314 Pulses slope........................314 Measured slope......................314 Delay settings (analog sources)..................315 Delay settings (digital...
  • Page 315 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements "First edge" Time is measured either between rising edges or between falling edges. The first edge is taken for the measurement. In single mea- surements, it works the same way as "Either". Only available for analog measurement sources. Remote command: on page 1194 MEASurement<m>:AMPTime:PFSLope...
  • Page 316 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements The edge direction is set with Edges slope. Setup/Hold measurement settings Setup/Hold measurements analyze the relative timing between two signals: a data sig- nal and the synchronous clock signal. Setup time is the time that the data signal is steady before clock edge - the time between a data transition and the next specified clock edge.
  • Page 317 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Remote command: Clock slope: on page 1197 MEASurement<m>:AMPTime:CSLope Clock ref level Selects the reference level of the clock on which the time is measured. The intersec- tion of slope and reference level defines the time point for measurements. The setting is used for setup and hold measurements, and for jitter measurements (option R&S RTP-K12).
  • Page 318 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Trigger event Trigger level Trigger source Slope Reference level Measurement source Delay to trigger See also: Chapter 7.2.5.3, "Measuring the Delay to Trigger", on page 318. To configure the trigger conditions, use the trigger setup. To set up the slope, additional settings appear in the measurements "Setup"...

  • Page 319: Eye Diagram Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements 1. Set the horizontal scale and horizontal position so that the trigger point and the slope both are visible on the screen. 2. Select the delay to trigger measurement: a) In the "Meas Group" dialog, set the "Category" to "Amp/Time". b) Press "Add/ Remove Measurements"...
  • Page 320 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Eye top Vcrossing Eye base 3σcrossing1 Eye width 3σcrossing2 Tcrossing1 Tcrossing2 Figure 7-9: Basic eye diagram characteristics Eye top = Mean of the upper vertical histogram σtop = Standard deviation of the upper vertical histogram Eye base = Mean of the lower vertical histogram σbase = Standard deviation of the lower vertical histogram...
  • Page 321 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Meas. type Description/Result Eye height The vertical eye opening indicates the sensitivity of the transmission to noise. (Eye top – 3 * σtop) – (Eye base + 3 * σbase) Eye width The horizontal eye opening indicates the time range during which the sampling of the logical state is possible.
  • Page 322 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Meas. type Description/Result Jitter (6*σ) Jitter (6*σ) = Jitter * 6 6σ Jitter (RMS) Quadratic mean of the jitter at both crossing points 7.2.6.2 Settings for Eye Diagram Measurements Access: "Meas" menu > "Meas Group" > "Eye" category Eye diagram measurements are only available for sources in the time domain.

  • Page 323: Spectrum Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements 7.2.7 Spectrum Measurements Spectrum analysis determines the frequencies of a given input signal over time. Vari- ous measurements can then be performed based on the signal spectrum. 7.2.7.1 Overview of Spectrum Measurements Table 7-6: Spectrum measurements Meas.
  • Page 324 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Meas. type Description, result THD_f, THD_a, These measurements require option R&S RTP-K37 Spectrogram. THD_u, THD_r THD_f is the root mean square of the sum of all amplitudes of the har- Total harmonic distor- monic waves in relation to the amplitude at the fundamental frequency tion (first harmonic): THD_a corresponds to THD[dB]:...
  • Page 325 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Figure 7-10: Parameters of peak list measurement (with option R&S RTP-K37) N db down The threshold until which the samples to the left and right of the peak value are ana- lyzed to determine the "Bandwidth". Remote command: on page 1205 MEASurement<m>:SPECtrum:NDBDown...
  • Page 326 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Peak excursion Defines a relative threshold, the minimum level value by which the waveform must rise or fall to be considered as a peak. To avoid identifying noise peaks, enter a peak excursion value that is higher than the noise levels. This setting is only available for spectrum waveforms.

  • Page 327: Histograms And Histogram Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements "Enable" Displays a description for each detected peak in the spectrum dia- gram. "Frame type" Defines the layout of the labels (full border, underline, or none). "Invert" Displays black font on white background using the "Full frame" label type.
  • Page 328 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements In a histogram, the maximum count of a waveform value is assigned to the full height (histogram peak). All other count values are displayed relative to the maximum. The following characteristic values can be determined for histograms (illustrated for a vertical histogram): 7.2.8.2 Overview of Histogram Measurements...
  • Page 329 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Table 7-7: Histogram measurements Meas. type Description/Result Waveform count The number of acquisitions (waveforms) the histogram is based on Waveform samples The number of samples from the most recent acquisition included in the current histogram Histogram samples The number of samples from all acquisitions included in the current his- togram...
  • Page 330 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Meas. type Description/Result Mean ±σ The range between (mean value + standard deviation) and (mean value - standard deviation) σ Mean ±2*σ The range between (mean value + 3 * standard deviation) and (mean value - 2 * standard deviation) σ...
  • Page 331 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements To create a histogram quickly with toolbar icons 1. Select the waveform for which you need a histogram. 2. Tap the histogram icon on the toolbar. 3. Select the histogram type in the sidebar: vertical for an amplitude, horizontal for a time-based histogram.
  • Page 332 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements 5. Select a "Source" for the histogram. The source can be any input signal, math or reference waveform. 6. Define the histogram "Mode": vertical for an amplitude, horizontal for a time-based histogram. 7. Define the range of the waveform for which the histogram is to be generated. Enter the start value and the stop value in x and in y direction, either as absolute or rela- tive values.
  • Page 333 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Mode Defines the type of histogram. "Vertical" Amplitude histogram (horizontal bars across amplitude) "Horizontal" Time histogram (vertical bars over time). For spectrum waveforms, horizontal histograms over spectrum are not available. Remote command: on page 1212 LAYout:HISTogram:MODE Reset now Resets the values to begin a new histogram.
  • Page 334 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements The measurement parameters are common for all histograms measurements, you find them directly on the "Meas Group" tab. Histogram Selects the histogram on which the measurement is based. Histograms are defined via the "Meas > Histogram" menu item. Remote command: on page 1217 MEASurement<m>:HISTogram:SELect...

  • Page 335: Jitter Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Remote command: on page 1218 MEASurement<m>:HISTogram:PROBability:LIMit 7.2.9 Jitter Measurements Jitter measurements are availabe if option R&S RTP-K12 is installed. Chapter 16.1, "Jitter Measurements", on page 932. 7.2.10 Result Analysis The behavior of measurement results over time can be evaluated in different ways: ●...
  • Page 336 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Label Description +Peak Positive peak value (maximum) -Peak Negative peak value (minimum) μ (Avg) Average Root mean square σ (S-dev) Standard deviation Event count Number of measured events (e.g. rising edges, pulses etc.) Wave count Number of waveforms (acquisitions) the measurement is based on Remote commands: ●...
  • Page 337 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Figure 7-11: Long-term measurement with statistics 1 = +Peak, maximum 2 = Average + standard deviation 3 = Average 2 = Average - standard deviation 1 = -Peak, minimum Stopping and starting the acquisition does not reset statistics but only stops and contin- ues them.
  • Page 338 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements sured at the end of the time period is written to the long-term waveform. In addition, statistical results for each time period are calculated, saved, and reset. This reset avoids constantly rising maximum or constantly falling minimum values until the end of the measurement.
  • Page 339 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Figure 7-12: Statistical results and measurement histogram of an amplitude measurement See also: "Enable (Histogram)" on page 341. 7.2.10.4 Track The track is a waveform that shows measurement values in time-correlation to the measured signal. It is the graphical interpretation of all measurement values of a single acquisition.
  • Page 340 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Figure 7-13: Track on a frequency measurement Creating a track waveform 1. Configure the measurement group. 2. Activate the measurement group. 3. Select the "Result Analysis" tab. 4. If several measurements are enabled, select the "Measurement for analysis / math".
  • Page 341 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Measurement for analysis / math Selects the measurement that is used as source for mathematic calculations, long-term measurements, and histograms. These evaluations are performed on one measure- ment only, not on all measurements of the group. Statistics are calculated for all mea- surements.
  • Page 342 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Remote command: on page 1223 MEASurement<m>:STATistics:HISTogram Number of bins Sets the number of bins - the number of vertical bars that build the histogram. If "Continuous auto scale" is enabled, the instrument determines the number of bins based on the timebase, the current measurements, and other settings.
  • Page 343 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements "Offset" Defines an offset for the long-term measurement and the measure- ment histogram. Remote command: on page 1225 MEASurement<m>:VERTical:CONT on page 1225 MEASurement<m>:VERTical:AUTO on page 1226 MEASurement<m>:VERTical:SCALe on page 1225 MEASurement<m>:VERTical:OFFSet Measure all events in each acquisition Normally, only one measurement is performed for each acquired waveform to get best performance.
  • Page 344 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Number of points Defines the total number of points to be displayed in the long-term measurement dia- gram. Remote command: on page 1226 MEASurement<m>:LTMeas:COUNt Scale mode Defines when the points of a long-term measurement are created. If statistics are enabled, each long-term measurement point shows the statistical mean and standard deviation of the results measured during the defined period.

  • Page 345: Limit And Margin Checks

    ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Measurements / point Defines the number of measurement results from which one point of the long-term measurement is created. This setting is only available if "Scale mode" is set to "Measurements". Remote command: on page 1224 MEASurement<m>:STATistics:RMEascount 7.2.11 Limit and Margin Checks Limit and margin checks evaluate whether the measurement result exceeds a specified...
  • Page 346 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements If "Print" is selected, configure the print settings as described in Chapter 11.3.2, "Printing Screenshots", on page 458. As a result of the limit check, the specified actions are performed and an icon indi- cates the status in the result box. 7.2.11.2 Limit and Margin Settings Access: "Meas"...
  • Page 347 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements outside Upper limit Upper margin Upper margin Upper limit Lower margin Lower limit Lower limit Lower margin outside Figure 7-14: Limit and margin definition Limits are stricter than the margins for the value check. Thus, the margins must be within the valid range.
  • Page 348 ® Measurements R&S Automatic Measurements Actions are initiated by all measurements and all results measured on one acquisition. Note that the violation actions do not distinguish between a margin violation and a limit violation. However, different icons are displayed in the result box. For each action, you can define the event on which the action is initiated: ●...

  • Page 349: Quick Measurements

    ® Measurements R&S Quick Measurements Report Creates and saves a report using the settings defined in "File" menu > "Report Setup". Remote command: on page 1233 MEASurement<m>:ONViolation:REPort Start Executable Starts an external application. Tap "Config Executable" to set the application path and parameters.

  • Page 350: Configuring The Quick Measurement

    ® Measurements R&S Quick Measurements 7.3.2 Configuring the Quick Measurement The default configuration of the quick measurement includes already 8 amplitude mea- surements. If these measurements do not fit the measurement task, you can modify the selection. 1. On the "Meas" menu, select "Meas Group". 2.

  • Page 351: Spectrum Analysis

    ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis 8 Spectrum Analysis The R&S RTP provides two ways of spectrum analysis: ● Basic FFT calculation, which is included in the firmware ● Spectrogram option R&S RTP-K37, which provides a wide range of analysis possi- bilities, for example, spectrogram, cursor and automatic measurements.
  • Page 352 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis The overlapping factor can be set freely. The higher the overlap factor, the more frames are used. This leads to more individual results and improves detection of transi- ent signal effects. However, it also extends the duration of the calculation. The size of the frame depends on the number of input signal values (record length), the overlap factor, and the FFT size (number of samples used for FFT calculation).
  • Page 353 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis Gate length Gate position Gate t[s] Center frequency f[Hz] Frequency span Restricting the result range You can restrict the results of the FFT analysis to a specified frequency range. The fre- quency range can be defined in two ways: ●...
  • Page 354 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis (im), the magnitude is displayed. For the "Advanced" mode FFT (φ) function, the phase is displayed. For magnitude display, you can select the scale and range of magnitudes to be dis- played. For linear scaling, the vertical value range of the input signal is used. For loga- rithmic scaling, the logarithmic power of the frequency is displayed.

  • Page 355: Configuring Spectrum Waveforms

    ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis ● FFT -dφ*df (group delay): the negative derivative of the phase with respect to fre- quency; useful to measure phase distortion 8.1.2 Configuring Spectrum Waveforms During FFT analysis, a signal in the time domain is converted to a spectrum of frequen- cies.
  • Page 356 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis To configure the spectrum of FFT analysis By default, a suitable frequency range for the expected horizontal values according to the resolution bandwidth is selected, in respect to performance and precision. Span and RBW settings are coupled. If a more precise evaluation is required, for example for postprocessing in a different application, disable the coupling and change the fre- quency ranges and resolution bandwidth values as required.
  • Page 357 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis To restrict the input values (gating) By default, the FFT is calculated for the entire record length as defined for the data acquisition. However, you can restrict the time range for which the FFT is calculated, resulting in a restricted spectrum.

  • Page 358: Fft Configuration Settings

    ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis 3. To eliminate phase shifts due to a limitation of the value range, enable the "Unwrap" function. 4. To suppress small phase values due to noise, enable the "Suppression" function and enter a "Threshold" value. To couple spectrum displays The settings for one or more spectrums can be coupled.
  • Page 359 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis Enable Math Signal..................... 359 Frequency axis (R&S RTP-K37 only)................359 Center frequency......................360 Frequency span......................360 Full span........................360 Start frequency......................360 Stop frequency......................360 Span/RBW Coupling....................360 Span/RBW Ratio......................360 Resolution BW......................361 Window type........................361 Use color table......................
  • Page 360 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis Center frequency Defines the position of the displayed frequency range, which is (Center - Span/2) to (Center + Span/2). The width of the range is defined using the "Frequency span" set- ting. Remote command: on page 1248 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:CFRequency Frequency span...
  • Page 361 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis Remote command: on page 1249 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio Resolution BW Defines the resolution bandwidth. Note that the resolution bandwidth is correlated with the span, record length and acquisition time. If a constant record length is to be used, the RBW may be adapted if the required number of samples cannot be acquired.
  • Page 362 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis If this option is disabled, the preset color of the selected channel source is displayed, and the intensity of the specific signal color varies according to the cumulative occur- rence of the values. For spectrum diagrams, this setting corresponds to the common waveform display.
  • Page 363 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis However, if the maximum number of FFTs is lower than the required number to cover the entire waveform, the waveform may only be analyzed partially. In this case, the "Frame coverage" indicates the percentage of the waveform that was analyzed, i.e. which part of the data was included in the FFT calculation.
  • Page 364 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis FFT gating allows you to restrict FFT analysis to a certain time base of the input signal. If no gate is used, you can define the record length as dependent on the RBW, or the RBW as dependent on the record length (which is defined by the acquisition time).
  • Page 365 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis Remote command: on page 1160 CALCulate:MATH<m>:STATe Use Gate Enables FFT gating and shows the gate. If enabled, the "Gate Definition" settings are displayed. If disabled, the relation between the record length and the RBW can be defined man- ually instead.
  • Page 366 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis on page 1311 SEARch:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1311 SEARch:GATE:RELative:STARt (Relative) Stop ← Gate Definition Defines the end value for the gate. Remote command: on page 1254 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STOP on page 1254 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:RELative:STOP on page 1229 MEASurement<m>:GATE:ABSolute:STOP on page 1229 MEASurement<m>:GATE:RELative:STOP on page 1311...
  • Page 367 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis Enable Math Signal..................... 367 Magnitude unit......................367 Reference level......................368 Vertical scaling mode (Manual/Auto)................368 Vertical maximum......................368 Vertical range......................368 Range..........................368 Phase unit........................368 Unwrap........................369 Suppression........................ 369 Threshold........................369 Enable Math Signal If activated, a diagram for the defined math waveform is displayed on the touch screen. Remote command: on page 1160 CALCulate:MATH<m>:STATe...
  • Page 368 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis "dBps, dBns, dBμs, dBms, dBs" Logarithmic scaling; related to time 1 ps, 1 ns, 1 μs, 1 ms, 1 s, respec- tively "dBHz, dBkHz, dBMHz, dBGz" Logarithmic scaling; related to frequency "dBA, dBmA, μdBA" Logarithmic scaling; related to current Remote command: on page 1256 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:MAGNitude:SCALe...
  • Page 369 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S FFT Analysis Remote command: on page 1257 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:PHASe:SCALe Unwrap If enabled, phase shifts due to a limitation of the value range are eliminated. Remote command: on page 1257 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:PHASe:UNWRap Suppression Enables noise suppression. Phase calculation is restricted to frequencies with a mini- mum magnitude, the threshold value.

  • Page 370: Spectrogram (Option R&S Rtp-K37)

    ® Spectrum Analysis R&S Spectrogram (Option R&S RTP-K37) Coupled Spectrum 1/2/3/4 Copies the current FFT settings of the selected math waveform (M1/M2/M3/M4) to the other selected math waveforms, and couples those waveforms. Thus, if any FFT set- ting for any of the coupled spectrums are changed, they are changed for all coupled spectrums.

  • Page 371: Spectrogram Functions

    ® Spectrum Analysis R&S Spectrogram (Option R&S RTP-K37) A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the y-axis shows the time. A third dimension, the power level, is indicated by different colors. Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies.

  • Page 372: Spectrogram Configuration Settings

    ® Spectrum Analysis R&S Spectrogram (Option R&S RTP-K37) A spectrogram diagram is displayed. A new signal icon for the spectrogram is dis- played on the sidebar ("SGx"). If the selected source is a channel waveform, an FFT is started, on which the spec- trogram is created.
  • Page 373 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S Spectrogram (Option R&S RTP-K37) Enable......................... 373 Time line 1/2........................373 Show lines permanently....................373 Enable Enables the spectrogram display. If enabled, a new signal icon for the spectrogram is displayed on the sidebar ("SGx"). Remote command: on page 1260 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:SPECtrogram:STATe Time line 1/2 A time line marks a single spectrum in the spectrogram, that is: the power vs frequency...
  • Page 374 ® Spectrum Analysis R&S Spectrogram (Option R&S RTP-K37) If disabled, only the small arrow icons are permanently visible. The line is only dis- played temporarily when you touch the arrow. User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 05...

  • Page 375: Mask Testing

    ® Mask Testing R&S About Mask Testing 9 Mask Testing 9.1 About Mask Testing Masks are used to determine whether the signal remains within specified limits, e.g. to uncover signal anomalies or test compliance and stability of digital signals. The limits are specified as "mask", which is laid over the input signal in the display.
  • Page 376 ® Mask Testing R&S About Mask Testing Acq. completed Number of tested acquisitions. Remote command: on page 1278 MTESt:RESult:COUNt:WAVeforms? Acq. remaining Remaining acquisitions until "Average count / Nx Single count" is reached. The value is useful if you test a specified number of acquisitions with action "Stop acquisition"...

  • Page 377: Mask Test Settings

    ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Test result A test has failed if the number of sample hits or acquisition hits exceeds the limit of "Violation tolerance" hits. Remote command: on page 1278 MTESt:RESult[:RESult]? 9.2 Mask Test Settings 9.2.1 Test Definition Access: [Mask] >...
  • Page 378 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Enable test Activates and deactivates the mask test. If the acquisition is running, the test starts immediately. Otherwise, the test starts when acquisition is started. The testing is stopped when acquisition is stopped, or if a stop action is configured with Stop acq..

  • Page 379: Mask Definition

    ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Example: The example test has failed when the sixth acquisition violated the mask. Remote command: on page 1263 MTESt:CONDition on page 1264 MTESt:TOLerance Save / load mask test Provides all functions to store and recall a mask test. The mask definition, defined actions and fail conditions are stored in an R&S RTP-specific .xml file.
  • Page 380 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Alternatively, you can set the corner points on the touch screen and adjust the values in the "Mask Definition" tab. To save the mask, select the "Test Definition" tab and save the mask test. Settings overview: Make sure that the correct "Mask Test"...
  • Page 381 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings ● Append a new segment at the end of the list. ● Remove the selected mask segment from the list. ● Select the region that builds the mask. – Inner region: the segment points form a closed geometrical shape, which is the mask segment.
  • Page 382 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Factor X ← Rescale Stretches or compresses the selected mask segment in horizontal direction. The x-val- ues of all points of the selected mask segment are multiplied with this factor. Factors >1 stretch the mask segment, while factors between 0 and 1 compress it. Negative val- ues are possible and change the algebraic sign.
  • Page 383 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Figure 9-1: Waveform mask Settings overview: Common settings: ● "Definition type" on page 378 ● "Source" on page 378 ● "Wfm Arithmetic" on page 128 Create mask Creates the upper and lower mask limit from the selected reference waveform. If the reference waveform was not defined before, it is created automatically from the mask test "Source"...
  • Page 384 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Remote command: on page 1271 MTESt:WFMLupdate Used reference Sets the reference waveform from which the mask is created. The reference waveform can be created before with "Reference Waveform Setup", or loaded from a file in the lower part of the dialog box. If the reference waveform was not defined before mask definition, it is created automatically from the mask test "Source"...
  • Page 385 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Figure 9-3: Waveform mask with vertical width = 0.5 div Remote command: on page 1272 MTESt:WFMRescale:YWIDth Vertical stretch Sets the vertical scaling to stretch the mask in y-direction. The scaling axis is the hori- zontal line through the lowest value of the lower mask limit.

  • Page 386: Event Actions /Reset

    ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Remote command: on page 1272 MTESt:WFMRescale:YPOSition Reference waveform: save to or load from file Loads the waveform from the selected file to the "Reference" and creates the mask immediately. See also: "Save to or load from file" on page 245.
  • Page 387 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Make sure that the correct "Mask Test" tab is selected on the left side before you enter the settings. Beep Generates a beep sound. Remote command: on page 1273 MTESt:ONViolation:BEEP Stop acq. Stops the waveform acquisition on mask violation. Remote command: on page 1273 MTESt:ONViolation:STOP...

  • Page 388: Mask Display

    ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Test Settings Remote command: on page 1275 MTESt:ONViolation:RUNexec Reset Clears all totals and results in all "Mask Test" result boxes. Remote command: on page 1263 MTESt:RST 9.2.4 Mask Display Access: [Mask] > "Mask Display" The "Mask Display" tab contains all settings for mask and hit display. Show mask Switches the display of all mask segments on or off.

  • Page 389: Working With Masks

    ® Mask Testing R&S Working with Masks Infinite highlight If selected, the mask hits are highlighted for an unlimited period of time. Remote command: on page 1276 MTESt:HIGHlight:INFinite Highlight time Sets the time how long the mask hits are highlighted. Remote command: on page 1276 MTESt:HIGHlight:TIME...

  • Page 390: Setting Up User Masks

    ® Mask Testing R&S Working with Masks 9.3.1 Setting Up User Masks 9.3.1.1 Creating User Masks There are two ways to create a new mask: ● Graphical way by tapping the mask points on the touchscreen, ● Numerical entry of the x- and y-values of the mask points. You can combine both methods.
  • Page 391 ® Mask Testing R&S Working with Masks 6. Set the corner points of the mask segment: a) In the "Definition of segment" area, tap "Insert". Point 1 appears. b) Tap the X-cell and enter the X-value of the point. c) Tap the Y-cell and enter the Y-value of the point. d) To insert the next point: ●...
  • Page 392 ® Mask Testing R&S Working with Masks To delete a point on the touch screen 1. Tap the mask segment from which you want to delete a point. The selected segment is now in definition mode, shown with blue color. 2.
  • Page 393 ® Mask Testing R&S Working with Masks 5. To add, delete, or move a point of a segment: a) Select the segment in the "Mask segments" table. b) Select the point in the "Definition of segment" table. c) To add or delete the selected point, use the buttons below the table. ●...

  • Page 394: Setting Up A Mask Test

    ® Mask Testing R&S Working with Masks all points are multiplied with the corresponding factor. Factors >1 stretch the mask segment, while factors between 0 and 1 compress it. Negative values are possible and change the algebraic sign. 6. To move the selected mask segment, enter the "X-Offset" for horizontal direction and the "Y-Offset"...

  • Page 395: Running A Mask Test

    ® Mask Testing R&S Working with Masks a) Select "Highlight hits" to display the sample hits. b) Set the "Highlight time" or "Infinite highlight". Set the "Color" of the sample hits. 5. Define the color of the masks segments depending on the violation state: ●...

  • Page 396: Saving And Loading Masks

    ® Mask Testing R&S Working with Masks ● The mask display is configured, see Chapter 9.3.3, "Configuring the Mask and Hit Display", on page 394. You can perform continuous testing or test a specified number of acquisitions. 1. Press the [Mask] key on the front panel. 2.

  • Page 397: Mask Testing On History Acquisitions

    ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Testing on Eye Diagrams 9.3.6 Mask Testing on History Acquisitions In the same way as for running acquisitions, you can set up and perform the mask test- ing also on history waveforms. The requirements for mask testing on history waveforms are also the same: ●...

  • Page 398: Eye Mask Definition

    ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Testing on Eye Diagrams If the definition type "Eye" is selected, a mask copy function is available: Create editable mask Converts the test and mask definitions of the current mask test to a new mask test of type "User".
  • Page 399 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Testing on Eye Diagrams Remote command: on page 1280 MTESt:EYEMask:TYPE Main width (W1), Minor width (W2) Main width defines the width of all eye mask shapes. Minor width defines the secon- dary width for hexagon and octagon mask shapes. Figure 9-6: Main and minor widths and heights of an octagon eye mask Remote command: on page 1281...
  • Page 400 ® Mask Testing R&S Mask Testing on Eye Diagrams "Offset top, Voltage distance from the eye shape center that limits the upper and Offset bottom" lower regions. Sets bottom and top offsets to the same value so that the outer "Symmetric"...

  • Page 401: Search Functions

    ® Search Functions R&S Overview: Search Definition and Results 10 Search Functions Search functions allow you to detect and analyze specific events in the acquired data quickly and simply. You can search in various waveforms for several events at once. The search area can be limited by a gate.

  • Page 402: Search Results

    ® Search Functions R&S Overview: Search Definition and Results ● Result presentation For each search, you define how the search results are displayed: in a result table and/or in a search zoom window. ● Noise rejection Hysteresis for the selected source is defined for each search separately, in abso- lute or relative values.

  • Page 403: Search Setup

    ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Enabling the search zoom window disables the search, stops a running acquisition, and displays the search results of the last acquisition in the zoom window. Navigating search results If a search zoom window has been opened, it shows the first result that was found. ►...

  • Page 404: Search Criteria

    ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup The search setup includes the source selection, the selection of search events (crite- ria), event-specific search conditions, and search control. 10.2.1 Search Criteria Access: [Search] > "Setup" tab Enable If you enable a search and run an acquisition, the search is performed continuously on the acquired data until acquisition is stopped.
  • Page 405 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Source Defines the waveform to be searched. The source can be any analog and digital input signal, math or reference waveform, or track. While the instrument triggers only on real input signals, it can search also calculated and restored waveforms. If the source is an FFT spectrum, you can perform a frequency marker search by using the cursor measurement and defining the peak excursion.

  • Page 406: Search Parameters

    ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup on page 1287 SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:ACOPy on page 1287 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:ACOPy on page 1287 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:ACOPy 10.2.2 Search Parameters Most parameters available for trigger event definition can also be configured as search conditions. Each event type is defined in a separate subtab. If the source is a spectrum, the instrument performs a frequency marker search.
  • Page 407 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Remote command: on page 1287 SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel[:VALue] 10.2.2.2 Glitch The glitch search works the same way as the glitch trigger. To apply the trigger settings to search, tap Copy 'A Trigger'. The glitch search is not available if the search source is a digital channel. Polarity, Range, Width See trigger settings: ●...
  • Page 408 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Polarity, Range, Width, ±Delta See trigger settings: ● "Polarity" on page 193 While the width trigger can only analyze positive or negative polarity, searching for a width is also possible for both polarities at the same time ("Either"). ●...
  • Page 409 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Polarity, Range, Runt width, ±Delta Time limit for the runt, see trigger settings: ● "Polarity" on page 192 ● "Range" on page 195 ● "Runt width" on page 195 ● "±Delta" on page 195 Remote command: on page 1291 SEARch:TRIGger:RUNT:POLarity...
  • Page 410 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Vertical condition Defines the run of the signal relative to the window, see "Vertical condition" on page 196. Remote command: on page 1298 SEARch:TRIGger:WINDow:RANGe Time condition, Width, ±Delta Set the time limit for the vertical condition, see: ●...
  • Page 411 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Trigger level Sets the voltage level for trigger search. The value is used for all search event types that require one trigger level. The search trigger level is search-specific, you can define different levels in different searches for the same event. Remote command: on page 1287 SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel[:VALue]...
  • Page 412 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup 10.2.2.8 Slew Rate The slew rate search settings are the same as the slew rate trigger settings. To apply the trigger settings to search, tap Copy 'A Trigger'. The slew rate search is not available if the search source is a digital channel. Polarity, Range, Slew rate, ±Delta ●...
  • Page 413 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Clock source, Clock edge, Clock level Set the clock settings. Both "Clock level" and "Clock edge" define the starting point for calculation of the setup and hold time. Remote command: on page 1301 SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CSOurce on page 1300 SEARch:TRIGger:DATatoclock:CEDGe on page 1301...
  • Page 414 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Clock source, Clock edge Define the clock settings. The clock signal is the waveform to be searched. Remote command: on page 1307 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:CSOurce on page 1307 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:CEDGe on page 1307 SEARch:TRIGger:STATe:CLEVel State pattern State settings are the same as for the state trigger. See also "Pattern"...

  • Page 415: Frequency Marker Search

    ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup Remote command: on page 1303 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:A[:ENABle] on page 1303 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:A:LOGic on page 1304 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:AB:LOGic on page 1304 SEARch:TRIGger:PATTern:ABCD:LOGic Timing condition: Mode, Range, Time, Width, ±Delta Additional time limitation to the pattern, see "Additional settings: Timing" on page 205.
  • Page 416 ® Search Functions R&S Search Setup 3. Tap the diagram with the waveform to be searched, or drag a rectangle on the dia- gram to define the search area. The default edge search is configured as "Search<x>" and performed. The "Search Results"...

  • Page 417: Search Gate

    ® Search Functions R&S Search Gate 10.3 Search Gate The gate defines the search area within the source waveform. You can use absolute or relative values to define the gate, or couple it to a previously defined zoom area. 10.3.1 Gate Settings Access: [Search] >...
  • Page 418 ® Search Functions R&S Search Gate Remote command: on page 1254 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:MODE on page 1229 MEASurement<m>:GATE:MODE on page 1310 SEARch:GATE:MODE (Relative) Start Defines the starting value for the gate. Remote command: on page 1253 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1254 CALCulate:MATH<m>:FFT:GATE:RELative:STARt on page 1229 MEASurement<m>:GATE:ABSolute:STARt on page 1229 MEASurement<m>:GATE:RELative:STARt...

  • Page 419: Defining The Search Gate

    ® Search Functions R&S Result Presentation Remote command: on page 1230 MEASurement<m>:GATE:CCOupling on page 1230 MEASurement<m>:GATE:CURSor 10.3.2 Defining the Search Gate If you create a search using the "Search" toolbar icon, you can directly define the gate by dragging a rectangle on the diagram. Otherwise, you define the gate in the "Gate" tab of the "Search"...
  • Page 420 ® Search Functions R&S Result Presentation Result table These settings refer to the search result table. Show result table ← Result table Displays or hides the search result table. Remote command: on page 1318 SEARch:RESult:SHOW Sort mode ← Result table Sorts the search results by x-value position or value of the result.
  • Page 421 ® Search Functions R&S Result Presentation If "Auto clear" is disabled, the first result of each acquisition is listed until the maximum number of entries in the table is reached. Clear results Clears the search results once and starts a new search. Remote command: on page 1284 SEARch:CLEar...

  • Page 422: Configuring The Search Results Presentation

    ® Search Functions R&S Result Presentation Horizontal ← Search zoom window Defines whether absolute or relative values are used to specify the x-axis values. Remote command: on page 1145 LAYout:ZOOM:HORZ:MODE on page 1315 SEARch:RESDiagram:HORZ:MODE Position / Relative position (horizontal) ← Search zoom window Defines the x-value of the centerpoint of the zoom area.

  • Page 423: Noise Reject

    ® Search Functions R&S Noise Reject This stops a running search and a running acquisition. The zoom area is indicated in the diagram that displays the source waveform of the search. The zoom window is displayed for the first result that was found. 2.

  • Page 424: Defining Noise Rejection For Searches

    ® Search Functions R&S Noise Reject Remote command: on page 1314 SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:NOISe[:STATe] Hysteresis mode Defines whether values absolute or relative to the vertical scaling are used. Remote command: on page 1313 SEARch:TRIGger:LEVel:NOISe:MODE Relative / Absolute hysteresis Defines a range in absolute or relative values around the search level. If the signal jit- ters inside this range and crosses the level, no search event is detected.

  • Page 425: Data And File Management

    ® Data and File Management R&S Instrument Settings 11 Data and File Management This chapter describes how to manage instrument settings, and measurement results like waveform data, numeric results and screenshots. The [Save Recall] key provides functions for saving and restoring data on the instru- ment.
  • Page 426 ® Data and File Management R&S Instrument Settings Figure 11-1: Save tab Access to load instrument settings: [Save Recall] key > "Recall" tab > "User settings" User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 05...

  • Page 427: Savesets

    ® Data and File Management R&S Instrument Settings Figure 11-2: Recall tab The R&S RTP provides three types of saving and restoring settings: ● Savesets contain the complete instrument and measurement configuration except for user-specific display settings. ● One File contains the saveset and active reference waveform files in a ZIP file. ●...
  • Page 428 ® Data and File Management R&S Instrument Settings 11.1.1.1 Save Saveset Settings Access: [Save Recall] key > "Save" tab > "Savesets" Save to file Enter the file name to save the setting data to, and select the file format with the format button on the right.

  • Page 429: One File

    ® Data and File Management R&S Instrument Settings Load from file Enter the file name to load the setting data from, and select the file format with the for- mat button on the right. Double-tap the file name to open the file selection dialog box. See also: Chapter 11.7, "File Selection Dialog",...

  • Page 430: Graphical Recall Function

    ® Data and File Management R&S Instrument Settings Load from file Enter the file name to load the setting data from, and select the file format with the for- mat button on the right. Double-tap the file name to open the file selection dialog box. See also: Chapter 11.7, "File Selection Dialog",...
  • Page 431 ® Data and File Management R&S Instrument Settings 1. On the toolbar, tap the "Graphical Recall " icon. A window opens and shows the screenshot of the first measurement configuration that is stored in the default directory. 2. Select if you want to display a "SaveSets" file or a reference waveform ("Ref Wfm").

  • Page 432: Saving And Loading Settings

    ® Data and File Management R&S Instrument Settings 11.1.4 Saving and Loading Settings Settings can be stored in a file with user-defined name and location, or in a quick save- set. The settings in a saveset can be saved and retrieved quickly at the touch of a but- ton, so savesets are ideal for frequently used measurements.

  • Page 433: Waveform Data And Results

    ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results To load a One File 1. Press the [Save Recall] key. 2. Select the "Recall" tab. 3. Press the "One File" button. 4. Tap "Load" to load the settings from the specified file. Tap "Open"...

  • Page 434: Waveform Export Files

    ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results ● Waveform Export Files..................434 ● Waveforms - Export Settings................440 ● Waveform Histogram.................... 445 ● Numeric Results....................447 ● Result Analysis......................449 ● Saving and Loading Waveform Data..............451 11.2.1 Waveform Export Files Waveforms can be stored in XML, CSV, or BIN format.
  • Page 435 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Header files contain the following properties: Table 11-1: Header file properties Value Description General FirmwareVersion Firmware version that is installed on the R&S RTP (last entry in the header file) Source Name of the exported waveform Resolution...
  • Page 436 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Value Description SignalRecordLength Number of required samples in the waveform. The value can differ from RecordLength and HWRecordLength if the source is, for example, a spectrum, a bus signal, a correlation or a measurement. The value is determined automatically considering the waveform parameters and their dependencies.
  • Page 437 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Value Description NofQuantisationLevels Theoretical number of quantization levels in the signal. This value depends on the waveform format (8 bit, 16 bit, …). In case of a math waveform, it depends on the quantization levels of the operands and on the operator type.
  • Page 438 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Value Description FreqSpan Frequency span of the spectrum FrequencyStart Start frequency of the spectrum FrequencyStop Stop frequency of the spectrum WindowType Window used for the spectrum computation ResolutionBW Resolution bandwidth of the spectrum AdjustedResolutionBW Actual resolution bandwidth of a spectrum waveform.
  • Page 439 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results – Envelope waveform: Ymin ; Ymax ; Ymin ; Ymax ; Ymin ; Ymax ; Ymin ; Ymax ; ... – Normal waveform, interleaved x/y data: ; ... – Envelope waveform, interleaved x/y data: ;Ymin ;...

  • Page 440: Waveforms - Export Settings

    ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results 11.2.1.3 Number of Samples in the Export File In this section, a sample is defined as one or more values acquired at a given sampling time. The number of samples for one channel and acquisition is given in the header file by the property SignalHardwareRecordLength.
  • Page 441 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results See also: Chapter 11.2.6, "Saving and Loading Waveform Data", on page 451. Source Selects the waveform to be exported if "Multichannel export" is disabled. Active wave- forms of input channels, math signals and reference waveforms are available for export.
  • Page 442 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Remote command: on page 1330 CHANnel<m>:EXPortstate Scope Defines the part of the waveform record that has to be stored. "Full wave- Saves the complete waveform record. form" "Zoom" Saves the data included in the zoom area if at least one zoom is defined for the source waveform.
  • Page 443 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Enabling "Data logging" stops a running acquisition. To start the logging, tap Start Export or press [Single]. Pressing "Run cont" disables data logging. If "Export history" is enabled, the option "Multiple Wfms" allows you to save several or all history waveforms.
  • Page 444 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results To save several subsequent history waveforms, enable "Multiple Wfms" and define the range of the waveforms to be saved using "Start acq" and "Stop acq". These range settings are also available in the "History" dialog box. Start the history replay and simultaneous saving with "Start Export".

  • Page 445: Waveform Histogram

    ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results If the high definition mode is active, the data format is integer 16 bit, except for peak detect decimation (8 bit). See "Export" on page 138. Only y-values are exported, the "Interleaved x/y" option is not available. Currently, the setting is not available for the export of digital channel data and data of R&S RT-ZVC channels.
  • Page 446 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Contents of the header file: ● Source waveform of the histogram ● Histogram mode: vertical or horizontal ● Incidence of exported values: absolute or relative ● Histogram range: XStart, XStop, YStart, YStop ●...

  • Page 447: Numeric Results

    ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Remote command: on page 1336 EXPort:HISTogram:INCidence Save to file Enter the filename to save the waveform histogram to. Double-tap the filename to open the file selection dialog box. By default, the filename has the prefix "Histogram_". You can define a pattern for auto- matic naming in the "Autonaming"...
  • Page 448 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Result selection The table lists all result boxes and decode tables that are currently open, including minimized boxes and docked boxes. Select the results that you want to save to file. All results are written into one file.

  • Page 449: Result Analysis

    ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results By default, the filename has the prefix "ResultBoxExport_". You can define a pattern for automatic naming in the "Autonaming" tab. "Save" Saves the selected results to the indicated file. "Save As..." Opens the file selection dialog box and saves the selected results to the selected file.
  • Page 450 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results – Upper peak – Lower peak – – Standard deviation – Average – Event count per point: number of measurement results that creates one long- term point – Waveform count per point: number of waveforms included in one long-term point.

  • Page 451: Saving And Loading Waveform Data

    ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results Export type You can export the result data of the long-term measurement, the measurement histo- gram or the track. To export the data, the required type must be enabled in "Measure- ments >...
  • Page 452 ® Data and File Management R&S Waveform Data and Results It is also possible to save history data to file. Furthermore, you can save a "live record" of a running RUN Nx SINGLE acquisition to one data file. For details on waveform save/recall settings, see Chapter 11.2.2, "Waveforms - Export Settings", on page 440.

  • Page 453: Screenshots

    ® Data and File Management R&S Screenshots a) Tap the "Save Waveform" icon on the toolbar. b) Tap the waveform to be saved. If you tap the diagram background, the data of the focused waveform is saved. To export waveform data of a running acquisition 1.

  • Page 454: Screenshot Settings

    ® Data and File Management R&S Screenshots Screenshots on a computer using the Web interface If the R&S RTP is connected to a LAN, you can create and save screenshots of the instrument's display on a computer. See Chapter 19.3.2, "Web Browser", on page 979.
  • Page 455 ® Data and File Management R&S Screenshots Printer..........................455 Color..........................455 Orientation........................456 Print..........................456 Preview........................456 └ Zoom......................456 Update.........................456 White background....................... 456 Inverse color........................456 Show setup dialog.......................457 Include signal bar......................457 Edit..........................457 Save to file........................457 Printer Selects a configured printer to print screenshots and reports. You can use a local printer or a network printer.
  • Page 456 ® Data and File Management R&S Screenshots "Color" Color output Remote command: on page 1342 HCOPy:DEVice<m>:COLor Orientation Toggles the page orientation between "Landscape" and "Portrait." Remote command: on page 1342 HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1..2> Print Prints the current image together with saved editing changes on the selected Printer. If the printer is configured to print to a file, "Print"...
  • Page 457 ® Data and File Management R&S Screenshots See also: "White background" on page 456. Remote command: on page 1342 HCOPy:DEVice<m>:INVerse Show setup dialog If you want to save dialog boxes in screenshots, enable "Show setup dialog". The cur- rently open dialog box is included in the screenshot. Use the [Camera] key to print or save the display.

  • Page 458: Printing Screenshots

    ® Data and File Management R&S Screenshots 11.3.2 Printing Screenshots You can configure the format and colors used for printing, and edit the image. 1. Open the "File" menu and select "Print setup". You can use a local printer or a net- work printer.

  • Page 459: Reports

    ® Data and File Management R&S Reports The file is saved and the dialog box closes. 6. Check if the screenshot is saved to the desired directory. 7. To save further screenshots, use one of the following ways: ● Configure the [Camera] key. Press the key to save a screenshot. See also Chapter 3.3, "Frontpanel Setup", on page 85.

  • Page 460: Report Settings

    ® Data and File Management R&S Reports 11.4.1 Report Settings Access: "File" menu > "Report Setup" Printer "Printer" on page 455. Language Selects the language to be used in the report. Available languages are listed in the data sheet. Remote command: on page 1346 REPort:LANGuage Paper size...

  • Page 461: Autonaming

    ® Data and File Management R&S Autonaming Remote command: on page 1346 REPort:USER on page 1346 REPort:COMMent Logo By default, the Rohde & Schwarz logo is shown in the header of the report pages. You can switch the logo off, or select your logo to be shown. A preview of the selected log file is shown.

  • Page 462: Autonaming Settings

    ® Data and File Management R&S Autonaming 11.5.1 Autonaming Settings In this tab, you can define the pattern for automatic file name generation. This name is used as the default file name. The default path is the storage location for all saved files and their subdirectories.
  • Page 463 ® Data and File Management R&S Autonaming Remote command: on page 1328 MMEMory:AUTonaming:PREFix Text input User-defined text to be inserted after the prefix. Remote command: on page 1328 MMEMory:AUTonaming:TEXT User text (enable) If enabled, inserts the specified user text after the prefix. Remote command: on page 1328 MMEMory:AUTonaming:USERtext...

  • Page 464: Defining Default File Paths And Names

    ® Data and File Management R&S Preset Setup 11.5.2 Defining Default File Paths and Names When a save or load operation is performed, a default file name and path is provided. You can configure which path is used and how the file name is generated. In the file selection dialog box, you can change the folder and name as desired.

  • Page 465: User-Defined Preset - Settings

    ® Data and File Management R&S Preset Setup 11.6.1 User-defined Preset - Settings Access: "File" menu > "Preset setup" Save to or load from file The file name with extension .dfl to load or to save the settings to. For details, see the Save to file function in the "Settings"...

  • Page 466: File Selection Dialog

    ® Data and File Management R&S File Selection Dialog ● Restoring settings from a file (see "To load settings from a saveset file" on page 432) For details on save/recall instrument settings and associated remote commands, see Chapter 11.1.1, "Savesets", on page 427.
  • Page 467 ® Data and File Management R&S File Selection Dialog Path Tap the path elements to change the current folder. The default folder is defined in Default path for all file operations. You can save the data in a local folder on the instrument, to an external storage device (usually a USB flash drive), or to a folder on a connected network drive.

  • Page 468: Protocol Analysis

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Basics of Protocol Analysis 12 Protocol Analysis Using the serial protocol options for the R&S RTP, you can analyze various serial pro- tocols. ● Basics of Protocol Analysis................... 468 ● I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1)..................477 ● SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1)................

  • Page 469: Decode - General Settings

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Basics of Protocol Analysis 12.1.1 Decode - General Settings For all protocols, configuration starts with the selection of the serial bus and the proto- col. The "Trigger Setup" button leads directly to the trigger configuration. Table 12-1: Configuration settings are protocol-specific. They are described in the related chapters: CAN, CAN FD Chapter 12.5.1, "CAN and CAN-FD Configuration",...

  • Page 470: Full Autoset

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Basics of Protocol Analysis 12.1.2 Full Autoset If you want to perform a quick protocol measurement, you can use the "Full Autoset" function. It allows you to find the correct instrument settings for the desired protocol. It displays at least one decoded frame after the execution.
  • Page 471 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Basics of Protocol Analysis For some protocols, the result table provides a button to show the details of the selected frame. Bus label Defines a label to be displayed with the bus. Remote command: on page 1349 BUS<m>:LABel Show decode table Opens a table with decoded data of the serial signal.
  • Page 472 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Basics of Protocol Analysis UART Chapter 12.4.4, "UART Decode Results", on page 514 8b/10b Chapter 12.13.4, "8b/10b Decode Results", on page 734 DDR3 Chapter 12.19.3, "DDR3 Decode Results", on page 863 Remote command: on page 1349 BUS<m>:RESult Table position Defines the position of the decode table on the screen.

  • Page 473: Label Lists

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Basics of Protocol Analysis Result export Opens the "File" dialog box. Select the "Waveforms/Results" tab > "Numeric" subtab to save the decode results to file. Show details Enable "Show details" in the decode table to display a more detailed analysis of the selected frame.
  • Page 474 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Basics of Protocol Analysis Command lines Command lines define the version of the PTT file and the protocol name: ● @FILE_VERSION: must appear exactly once in the file ● @PROTOCOL_NAME: must appear at least once in the file. Thus, one file can contain several label lists for different protocols.
  • Page 475 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Basics of Protocol Analysis Following lines yield the same result: 7d,0x11,Pressure 7h,11h,Pressure 0x7,17d,Pressure 7,17,Pressure 12.1.4.2 Label List - General Settings In the "Label List" tab, you can load, read and activate label list files. The common settings for all protocols are: Save to or load from file Selects and loads a label list file.

  • Page 476: Bit Pattern Editor

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Basics of Protocol Analysis Apply label list Activates the label list to be used for decoding. The "Label" appear in the "Decode results" table and in the frame captions of the decoded signal. Remote command: on page 1351 BUS<m>:SYMBols 12.1.5 Bit Pattern Editor If you want to enter a specified address or data pattern, the bit pattern editor helps you...

  • Page 477: I²C (Option R&S Rtp-K1)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) ● Hex: most common format in the right column. ● Octal: Each digit represents 3 bit. ● ASCII: In the ASCII column, "X" is the character X. The binary X (do not care) is not allowed.
  • Page 478 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) Data transfer The format of a simple I²C message (frame) with 7-bit addressing consists of the fol- lowing parts: ● Start condition: a falling slope on SDA while SCL is high ● 7-bit address of the slave device that either is written to or read from ●...

  • Page 479: I²C Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) Trigger The R&S RTP can trigger on various parts of I²C messages. The data and clock lines must be connected to the input channels, triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possible. You can trigger on: ●...
  • Page 480 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) SDA, SCL Set the waveforms of the data line (SDA) and clock line (SCL). Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.

  • Page 481: I²C Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) 12.2.2.2 Configuring I²C Protocol The configuration of the I²C is simple - assign the two lines to input channels, and set the thresholds. For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 12.2.2, "I²C Configuration", on page 479.
  • Page 482 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ● The trigger source is "Serial bus": [Trigger] >...
  • Page 483 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) "Stop" Sets the trigger to the end of the message. The stop condition is a ris- ing slope on SDA while SCL is high. "No Ack (Miss- Missing acknowledge bit: the instrument triggers if the data line ing Ack)"...
  • Page 484 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) "Data read Marks the end of the read process when the master reads data from Nack" the slave. This Nack is sent according to the protocol definition, it is not an error. Remote command: on page 1357 TRIGger<m>:I2C:ADNack...
  • Page 485 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) Remote command: on page 1359 TRIGger<m>:I2C:ACONdition R/W bit ← Address setup Toggles the trigger condition between Read and Write access of the master. Select "Either" if the transfer direction is not relevant for the trigger condition. Remote command: on page 1357 TRIGger<m>:I2C:ACCess...

  • Page 486: I 2 C Label List

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) Index min, Index max ← Data setup Sets the number of data bytes to be skipped after the address. The index 0 is associ- ated with the first data byte. If the Position defines a range, the first and the last byte of interest are defined.
  • Page 487 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) An I C label file contains three values for each address: ● Address type, 7-bit or 10-bit long ● Address value ● Symbolic label: name of the address, specifying its function in the bus network. Example: I C PTT file # ----------------------------------------------------------------------------...

  • Page 488: I²C Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) Remote command: ● on page 1367 BUS<m>:I2C:FRAMe<n>:SYMBol? 12.2.5 I²C Decode Results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Decode" tab, enable "Decode". 2.
  • Page 489 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) The signal in Figure 12-4 shows a write access followed by a read access, both with 10bit address. The decoded data shows a No Ack bit at the end of the read data. This No Ack bit is sent according to the protocol definition and is not an error.

  • Page 490: Search On Decoded I²C Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) Column Description R/W bit Value of the R/W bit Ack bit Value of the address acknowledge bit Values Value of all data bytes of the frame. The data format is selected below the table. Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail.
  • Page 491 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) Search criteria Enable the events to be searched for. Unlike triggering, where you can trigger only on one defined event, you can search for various different events in one search. "Start" Searches for the start of the message. The start condition is a falling edge on SDA while SCL is high.
  • Page 492 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) on page 1372 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:SADDress on page 1372 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:ADOR on page 1372 SEARch:TRIGger:I2C:ADData Address setup: Condition, Type, Addr. min, Addr. max, R/W bit The address setup consists of the condition, type, R/W bit and one or two address pat- terns.
  • Page 493 ® Protocol Analysis R&S I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1) Address OR setup: Monitor, Address type, Address, R/W bit The address OR setup consists of the monitor, address type, address and an R/W bit. The address OR setup settings are the same as in the I2C trigger setup, see "Address OR conditions"...

  • Page 494: Spi Bus (Option R&S Rtp-K1)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) The "Show search zoom windows" function allows you to analyze the search results in more detail. Search zoom and result table are synchronized; if you select a row in the result table, this result is shown in the search zoom. For an introduction to search results, see: ●...

  • Page 495: The Spi Protocol

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) 12.3.1 The SPI Protocol A 4-channel instrument is required for full support of the SPI protocol, or the MSO option R&S RTP-B1. The Serial Peripheral Interface SPI is used for communication with slow peripheral devices, in particular, for transmission of data streams.
  • Page 496 ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side. See also: Chapter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings", on page 469. SCLK Defines the settings for the clock line. SCLK source ←...
  • Page 497 ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) SS, MISO, MOSI Configures the Slave Select, MISO and MOSI lines. Source ← SS, MISO, MOSI Sets the input channel of the selected line. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
  • Page 498 ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) Remote command: on page 1389 BUS<m>:SPI:SCLK:THReshold on page 1389 BUS<m>:SPI:MISO:THReshold on page 1389 BUS<m>:SPI:MOSI:THReshold on page 1389 BUS<m>:SPI:SSELect:THReshold on page 1389 BUS<m>:SPI:TECHnology on page 1348 BUS<m>:SETReflevels on page 1349 BUS<m>:FAUToset Bit order Defines if the data of the messages starts with msb (most significant bit) or lsb (least significant bit).

  • Page 499: Spi Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) 1. Press the [Protocol] key on the front panel. 2. At the left hand-side, select the vertical tab of the bus you want to set up. 3. Select the "Configuration" tab. 4.
  • Page 500 ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ●...
  • Page 501 ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) Condition ← MOSI and MISO data conditions Selects the operator for the "Data" pattern: "Equal" or "Not equal". Remote command: on page 1392 TRIGger<m>:SPI:FCONdition MOSI pattern, MISO pattern ← MOSI and MISO data conditions Specify the data patterns to be found on the MOSI and/or MISO line.

  • Page 502: Spi Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) "Bit-aligned" Bit-by-bit: the pattern can start at any position in the message. Remote command: on page 1391 TRIGger<m>:SPI:PALignment 12.3.3.2 Triggering on SPI Prerequisites: A bus is configured for the SPI signal to be analyzed. 1.
  • Page 503 ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) Figure 12-7: Decoded and binary SPI signal with SCLK, MOSI, and SS line green brackets [...] = start and end of complete frame red brackets [...] = start and end of incomplete frame yellow = word = error...

  • Page 504: Search On Decoded Spi Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) Table 12-4: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Frame start , Frame stop Times of frame start and frame end Word count Number of words in the frame MOSI values Value of the MOSI data words.
  • Page 505 ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) 12.3.5.1 SPI Search Setup Access: [Search] > "Setup" tab Type Sets the event to be searched for. "Frame start Searches for the start of the frame when slave select signal SS (SS)"...
  • Page 506 ® Protocol Analysis R&S SPI Bus (Option R&S RTP-K1) Remote command: on page 1399 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:FCONdition on page 1399 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:MISopattern on page 1399 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:MOSipattern on page 1399 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:DPOPerator on page 1400 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:DPOSition on page 1400 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:DPTO on page 1400 SEARch:TRIGger:SPI:PALignment 12.3.5.2 SPI Search Results The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.

  • Page 507: Uart/Rs-232/Rs-422/Rs-485 (Option R&S Rtp-K2)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) Remote commands are listed in Chapter 20.17.4.5, "SPI Search Results", on page 1401. 12.4 UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) 12.4.1 The UART / RS232 Interface The Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter UART converts a word of data into serial data, and vice versa.

  • Page 508: Uart Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) Trigger The R&S RTP can trigger on specified parts of UART serial signals: ● Start bit ● Packet start ● Parity errors, and breaks ● Stop errors ● A serial pattern at any or a specified position 12.4.2 UART Configuration 12.4.2.1 UART Configuration Settings...
  • Page 509 ® Protocol Analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus. Do not combine a reference waveform with channel or math waveform because the time correlation of these waveforms might differ.
  • Page 510 ® Protocol Analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) Bit rate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second. To select a bit rate from list of prede- fined values, tap the icon beside the "Bit rate" field. To enter a specific value, open the keypad.
  • Page 511 ® Protocol Analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) "End word" Defines a pattern as end condition of a packet, for example, a reserved word like CR or LF. The bit pattern editor provides frequently used values in the "Predefined values" list below the pattern table. A new packet starts with the first start bit after the defined end pat- tern.

  • Page 512: Uart Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) 12.4.3 UART Trigger 12.4.3.1 UART Trigger Settings Access: [Protocol] > "Trigger" tab > "Source = Serial Bus" > select "Protocol = UART / RS232" Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ●...
  • Page 513 ® Protocol Analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) "Stop error" Triggers if the stop bit is a logic 0. Remote command: on page 1411 TRIGger<m>:UART:TYPE Trigger source Selects the transmitter or receiver line as trigger source. Remote command: on page 1411 TRIGger<m>:UART:SOURce Data conditions Specify the data conditions if the trigger type is set to "Data".

  • Page 514: Uart Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) 12.4.3.2 Triggering on UART Signals Prerequisites: An UART bus is configured, see Chapter 12.4.3.1, "UART Trigger Set- tings", on page 512. 1. Press the [Protocol] key and select the "Trigger" tab. 2. Press the "Select" button. The "Source" button is shown. 3.
  • Page 515 ® Protocol Analysis R&S UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2) Figure 12-10: Decoded and binary UART signal blue = start and stop bits if ok = start error, stop error, parity error orange = parity bit if ok yellow = word ok magenta = word contains error The "Decode results"...

  • Page 516: Can And Can Fd (Options R&S Rtp-K3 And -K9)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Column Description Tx value Value of the Tx word. The data format is selected below the table. Rx value Value of the Rx word. The data format is selected below the table. Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail.

  • Page 517: Can And Can-Fd Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) ● CAN FD: option R&S RTP-K9, requires CAN option R&S RTP-K3 12.5.1 CAN and CAN-FD Configuration Access: [Protocol] key > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = "CAN" or "CAN/CAN-FD" Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side.
  • Page 518 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Figure 12-13: Configuration for CAN See also: Chapter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings", on page 469. Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus. Remote command: on page 1348 BUS<m>:TYPE Decode...
  • Page 519 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Remote command: on page 1415 BUS<m>:CAN:DATA:SOURce Type Selects the CAN-High or CAN-Low line. CAN uses both lines for differential signal transmission. If you measure with a differential probe, connect the probe to both CAN-H and CAN-L lines, and select the data "Type"...
  • Page 520 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Note: If the sources are digital channels, the same threshold values are used for the parallel and the serial buses. You can set the thresholds either in the parallel bus con- figuration or in the serial bus configuration.

  • Page 521: Can / Can Fd Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) To specify the bit timing, enter either "Time seg1" and "Time seg2", or directly the "Sample point". Additionally, set the "Jump width". "Time seg1, Set the number of time quanta before the sample point (Time seg1) and after the sample point (Time seg2).
  • Page 522 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) 12.5.2.1 Trigger Settings Access: [Protocol] > "Trigger" tab > "Source = Serial Bus" > select "Protocol = CAN/ CAN-FD" Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ●...
  • Page 523 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) "Frame type" Triggers on a specified frame type (data, remote, error, or overload). For data and remote frames, also the identifier format is considered. For details, see: ●...
  • Page 524 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) "Remote" Remote frames are only available in the CAN protocol. The remote frame initiates the transmission of data by another node. The frame format is the same as of data frames but without the data field.
  • Page 525 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Figure 12-14: Identifier setup for CAN FD "Frame type" Data frames and remote frames contain an identifier. Select the frame type to be triggered on, or select "Any" if the frame type is not rele- vant.
  • Page 526 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Remote command: on page 1423 TRIGger<m>:CAN:FDATa:FDF on page 1423 TRIGger<m>:CAN:FDATa:BRS on page 1423 TRIGger<m>:CAN:FDATa:ESI Data setup: DLC, NDB, Transfer, Condition, Data min, Data max The data setup consists of the transfer direction, the number of bytes, the condition, and one or two data patterns.
  • Page 527 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) "DLC, NDB" "DLC" sets the Data Length Code, which defines the number of data bytes to be found. "NDB" shows the number of data bytes that is set by the DLC. DLC and NDB are different in CAN FD for DLCs >...
  • Page 528 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) "Data index Defines the number of the first data byte at which the data pattern (min)" may start. Sets the number of the last byte at which the required data pattern "Data index (max)"...
  • Page 529 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) A stuff count error occurs if th received stuff count value does not match the value calculated from the own stuff bit count. Only relevant for CAN FD signals in ISO standard.
  • Page 530 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Figure 12-17: Trigger setup to trigger on the 2nd data byte with value = E7 Figure 12-18: Data type trigger on 2nd data byte with value = E7 User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─...
  • Page 531 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Example: Triggering on the seventh or later data byte The CAN FD frame has 12 or more data bytes, where the value of the seventh or later data byte should be 17.
  • Page 532 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Figure 12-20: Data type trigger on data byte with the 7th or later byte value = 17 Example: Triggering on a data byte at a given position The CAN FD frame has 12 or more data bytes.
  • Page 533 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Figure 12-21: Trigger setup to trigger on data byte with value = 17 at 11th data byte location The instrument skips the first 3 data bytes and starts comparing the data pattern with the 4th data byte.

  • Page 534: Can / Can Fd Label List

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) 12.5.3 CAN / CAN FD Label List Label list files (symbolic data files) for CAN and CAN FD protocols are available in PTT and CSV file formats, similar to other serial protocols. In addition, the R&S RTP can read and apply DBC files to the decoded signal and provides settings for symbolic trig- gering and symbolic search.
  • Page 535 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) The usage of DBC files is described in Chapter 12.5.6, "Symbolic Trigger, Decode and Search", on page 548. 12.5.3.2 PTT and CSV Files for CAN / CAN FD Label list files are protocol-specific.

  • Page 536: Can And Can Fd Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) 29,01A54321h,Throttle 29,13A00FA2h,LightState 29,0630ABCDh,Engine_Status 29,03B1C002h,Airbag_Status 29,01234ABCh,NM_Gateway # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- For general information on the "Label List" tab, see Chapter 12.1.4, "Label Lists", on page 473. Remote command: ● on page 1430 BUS<m>:CAN:FRAMe<n>:SYMBol? 12.5.4 CAN and CAN FD Decode Results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded:...
  • Page 537 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) The color-coding of the various protocol sections and errors simplifies the interpretation of the visual display. The decode information condenses or expands, depending on the horizontal scale. Various data formats are available to show the result values. The binary results of data bytes are displayed MSB first.
  • Page 538 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Figure 12-24: Decoded CAN FD signal with data type = CAN_L, arbitration rate = 1 Mbps and data rate = 2 Mbps You can also load and apply industry-standard DBC files. The symbolic names from the file are applied to the display of the decoded data, see Chapter 12.5.6.2, "Symbolic Decode...
  • Page 539 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Table 12-6: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame. "Insuffcient waveform length" indicates that the frame is not completely contained in the acquisition.

  • Page 540: Search On Decoded Can Or Can Fd Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) 4. Tap "Save" or "Save as". Remote commands Remote commands are described in Chapter 20.17.6.3, "Decode Results", on page 1427. 12.5.5 Search on Decoded CAN or CAN FD Data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data.
  • Page 541 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Search Criteria Sets one criterion or an AND-combination of criteria to be searched for. If more than one criterion is selected, all criteria must be fulfilled by a frame for it to be shown in the search results.
  • Page 542 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) on page 1436 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SIDData on page 1437 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SERRor on page 1453 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SSYMbolic Standard Selects the CAN standard: "CAN", "CAN FD", or "Any". The setting is available in CAN FD option R&S RTP-K9. Use "Any"...
  • Page 543 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) The identifier setup settings are the same as in the CAN trigger setup, see "Identifier setup: Condition, Identifier min, Identifier max" on page 524. FD bits: see "FD bits"...
  • Page 544 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Figure 12-26: Identifier + Data search setup for CAN signals Figure 12-27: Identifier + Data search setup for CAN FD signals Remote command: on page 1439 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:DCONdition on page 1439 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:DMIN on page 1440...
  • Page 545 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Error Condition Selects the error type to be searched for. You can select one or more error types as search condition. The error types are the same as in the CAN trigger setup, see "Error conditions"...
  • Page 546 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) ● on page 1447 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:DATA? ● on page 1446 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:DLCState? ● on page 1447 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:DLCValue? ● on page 1446 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:IDSTate? ● on page 1448 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:IDTYpe? ● on page 1448 SEARch:RESult:CAN:FRAMe<m>:IDValue? ●...
  • Page 547 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Example: Searching for a specific byte anywhere in the frame The CAN FD frame has 8 or more data bytes, containing at least one data byte with value = CB anywhere in the data field.

  • Page 548: Symbolic Trigger, Decode And Search

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Figure 12-29: Search result 12.5.6 Symbolic Trigger, Decode and Search The R&S RTP can read and apply industry-standard DBC files to the decoded signal and provides settings for symbolic triggering and symbolic search. For a description of DBC files, see Chapter 12.5.3.1, "DBC Files for CAN / CAN FD",...
  • Page 549 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) The "Frame type" is automatically set to "Data", and the "Identifier" is shown for infor- mation. Specific settings for the symbolic trigger are: Message........................549 Trigger on signal......................549 Signal..........................
  • Page 550 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) The setting is used by symbolic trigger and symbolic search. Thus, you always trigger on and search for the same signal if symbolic trigger and symbolic search is used at the same time.
  • Page 551 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Figure 12-30: Result table and decoded CAN signal with applied DBC file and zoom on EngineData message Remote command: ● on page 1452 BUS<m>:CAN:FRAMe<n>:SDATa? 12.5.6.3 Symbolic Search Access: [Search] >...
  • Page 552 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) If symbolic search is active, the "Frame type" is automatically set to "Data", and the "Identifier" is shown for information. Symbolic Enables the symbolic search and disables all other search criteria. Remote command: on page 1453 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SSYMbolic...
  • Page 553 ® Protocol Analysis R&S CAN and CAN FD (Options R&S RTP-K3 and -K9) Remote command: on page 1454 SEARch:TRIGger:CAN:SYMBolic:SIGValue Condition Sets the operator to set a specific data pattern or symbolic value ("Equal" or "Not equal") or a data range. This condition is also used to search for data, see "Data setup: DLC, NDB, Condition, Data min, Data max"...

  • Page 554: Lin (Option R&S Rtp-K3)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) Figure 12-31: Search results table and search zoom window. Search for signal "IdleRunning" with value "Running" (bit value = 0) The figure shows the result of a search for an "EngineData" message and the signal "IdleRunning = Running"...

  • Page 555: The Lin Protocol

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) 12.6.1 The LIN Protocol This chapter provides an overview of protocol characteristics, frame format, identifiers and trigger possibilities. For detailed information, order the LIN specification on http:// www.lin-subbus.org/ (free of charge). LIN characteristics Main characteristics of LIN are: ●...

  • Page 556: Lin Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) Figure 12-33: Structure of a byte field Data bytes are transmitted LSB first. The identifier byte consists of 6 bits for the frame identifier and two parity bits. This combination is known as protected identifier. Trigger The R&S RTP can trigger on various parts of LIN frames.
  • Page 557 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) See also: Chapter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings", on page 469. Data Sets the source waveform of the data line. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.

  • Page 558: Lin Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) Remote command: on page 1457 BUS<m>:LIN:BITRate LIN standard Selects the version of the LIN standard that is used in the DUT. The setting mainly defines the checksum version used during decoding. The most common version is LIN 2.x. For mixed networks, or if the standard is unknown, set the LIN standard to "Auto".
  • Page 559 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ● The trigger source is "Serial bus": [Trigger] >...
  • Page 560 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) "Frame ID Defines the bit pattern of the slave identifier. Enter only the 6-bit iden- min / Frame tifier without parity bits, not the protected identifier. ID" In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). The bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern in any format, see Chapter 12.1.5, "Bit Pattern Editor",...
  • Page 561 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) "Data length" Sets the length of the bit pattern to be found, in bytes. For Big Endian transfer direction, you can trigger on a number of bytes less than the data length of the frame, that means, on the first bytes that are transmitted.

  • Page 562: Lin Label List

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) Remote command: on page 1462 TRIGger<m>:LIN:CHKSerror on page 1463 TRIGger<m>:LIN:ERRPattern on page 1463 TRIGger<m>:LIN:CRCDatalen on page 1463 TRIGger<m>:LIN:STANdard on page 1462 TRIGger<m>:LIN:IPERror on page 1462 TRIGger<m>:LIN:SYERror 12.6.3.2 Triggering on LIN Signals Prerequisites: An LIN bus is configured, see Chapter 12.2.2.2, "Configuring I²C Proto- col", on page 481.
  • Page 563 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) # Following ID is provided as integer 33,Mirror 0x37,Indoor lights # Labels for reserved addresses 0x3C,Master_Request_Frame 0x3D,Slave_Response_Frame # ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- For general information on label lists, see Chapter 12.1.4, "Label Lists", on page 473. For general information on the "Label List"...
  • Page 564 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) ● Encoding to signal mapping Example of a LIN LDF file LIN_description_file; LIN_protocol_version = "2.0"; LIN_language_version = "2.0"; LIN_speed = 19.2 kbps; Nodes { Master: Master1, 10 ms, 0.1 ms; Slaves: Slave_Motor, Slave_Sensor; Signals { Sensor1:1,0x0,Slave_Sensor, Master1;...

  • Page 565: Lin Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) Remote commands: ● on page 1465 BUS<m>:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SDATa? ● on page 1466 BUS<m>:LIN:FRAMe<n>:SDEXport? 12.6.5 LIN Decode Results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Decode" tab, enable "Decode". 2.
  • Page 566 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) Figure 12-34: Decoded and binary LIN signal, and decode results green brackets [...] = start and end of frame green frame header = frame state is ok red frame header = error in frame magenta frame header = wakeup frame magenta = break...

  • Page 567: Search On Decoded Lin Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) Column Description Sync state Result of synchronization Frame ID (hex) Identifier value Label Symbolic label name defined in the label list Frame PID (hex) Protected identifier Values Value of the data bytes. The data format is selected below the table. Chks (hex) Checksum value Zooming on decoded results...
  • Page 568 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) 12.6.6.1 LIN Search Setup Access: [Search] > "Setup" tab Search criteria Sets the type to be searched for. "Start of frame Searches for the stop bit of the sync field. (Sync)" "Identifier" Searches for one specific identifier or an identifier range.
  • Page 569 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) Remote command: on page 1471 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:SSOFrame on page 1471 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:SFIDentifier on page 1472 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:IDENtifieror on page 1472 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:SIDData on page 1472 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:WUFRame on page 1472 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:SERRor Identifier setup: Condition, Frame ID min, Frame ID max The identifier setup consists of the condition and one or two frame ID patterns.
  • Page 570 ® Protocol Analysis R&S LIN (Option R&S RTP-K3) on page 1476 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:DLENgth on page 1475 SEARch:TRIGger:LIN:BORDer Identifier OR setup: Monitor, Frame ID The identifier OR setup consists of the monitor and frame ID. The identifier OR setup settings are the same as in the LIN trigger setup, see "Identifier OR setup: Monitor, Frame ID"...

  • Page 571: Ethernet 10Base-T And 100Base-Tx (Option R&S Rtp-K8)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) The "Show search zoom windows" function allows you to analyze the search results in more detail. Search zoom and result table are synchronized; if you select a row in the result table, this result is shown in the search zoom.

  • Page 572: The Ethernet Protocol

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) ● Ethernet Label List....................580 ● Ethernet Decode Results..................581 ● Search on Decoded Ethernet Data............... 584 12.7.1 The Ethernet Protocol The two Ethernet protocol variants that R&S RTP-K8 can process have the following features: ●...
  • Page 573 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) Figure 12-36: Serial bus protocol configuration dialog For general information on how to configure protocol parameters, see also: Chap- ter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings", on page 469. Protocol Defines the protocol type of the selected serial bus.
  • Page 574 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) "10BASE-T" Selects the Ethernet protocol variant 10BASE-T (standard data rate 10 Mbit/s). Figure 12-37: Ethernet 10BASE-T protocol configuration (here with inverted polarity) "100BASE-TX" Selects the Ethernet protocol variant 100BASE-TX, which provides 100 Mbit/s use data rate.
  • Page 575 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) Remote command: on page 1484 BUS<m>:ETHernet:POLarity Thresholds Sets the threshold value for the digitization of each signal line. If the signal value on the line is higher than the upper threshold, the signal state is high. Otherwise, if the signal value is below the lower threshold, the signal state is considered low.
  • Page 576 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) Remote command: on page 1486 BUS<m>:ETHernet:BITRate 12.7.2.2 Ethernet Display Settings Access: [Protocol] > "Configuration" tab > "Protocol = Ethernet" > "Display" tab To enhance the decode possibilities of the Ethernet protocol, you can use an additional setting in the "Display"...

  • Page 577: Ethernet Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) 6. Tap "Ethernet Variant" and select the variant ("10BASE-T" or "100BASE-TX") you want to set up. Note: Note that no triggering on the serial bus is available. To trigger the signal, use the edge trigger on the source channel. 7.
  • Page 578 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) Figure 12-39: Ethernet trigger event settings dialog Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ●...
  • Page 579 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) "Pattern" Sets the trigger to any bit pattern (data) that can be freely specified, starting from the beginning of the frame. The trigger instant is after the last bit of the specified data pattern. Remote command: on page 1486 TRIGger<m>:ETHernet:TYPE...

  • Page 580: Ethernet Label List

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press [Trigger] or, if coming from the serial bus protocol configuration dialog (Chap- ter 12.7.2.1, "Ethernet Configuration Settings", on page 572), tap on "Trigger Setup".

  • Page 581: Ethernet Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) # xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx/yy support other length headers # yy should be the header length in decimal # yy should be between 24 - 48 # --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 00:00:0C, Cisco 00:01:13, Olympus 00:01:14, KandaTsu 00:04:07, TopconPo 00:0B:64, KiebackP...
  • Page 582 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table" and "Show binary signals". For a description of the display set- tings, see also Chapter 12.1.3, "Display", on page 470...
  • Page 583 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) Figure 12-41: Ethernet 100BASE-TX: decoded and binary signal (zoomed view) green brackets [...] = start / end of frame blue frame = frame ok red frame = error frame grey = preamble / SFD / FrameCheck green...

  • Page 584: Search On Decoded Ethernet Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) Column Description Destination Symbol Translation (or symbolic label) of the destination address, if the label list is enabled. Source Symbol Translation (or symbolic label) of the source address, if the label list is enabled. Number of Words Number of words in the frame Zooming on decoded results...
  • Page 585 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) If you need information on how to get started with searching Ethernet data, see Chap- ter 12.7.6.3, "Searching Ethernet Data", on page 587. Otherwise proceed with the Ethernet search setup. 12.7.6.1 Ethernet Search Setup Access: [Search] >...
  • Page 586 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) Remote command: on page 1492 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:DCONdition on page 1493 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:DMIN on page 1493 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:FRAMe:DMAX Source address ← Frame To search for a source address, an address pattern or optionally an address range have to be specified.
  • Page 587 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) Length Error ← Error Condition Searches for any preamble errors. Remote command: on page 1497 SEARch:TRIGger:ETHernet:ERRor:LENGth 12.7.6.2 Ethernet Search Results The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
  • Page 588 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX (Option R&S RTP-K8) The search dialog for Ethernet protocol analysis is opened. 4. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 12.7.6.1, "Ethernet Search Setup", on page 585. 5. To acquire a waveform, press [Single]. The R&S RTP performs an Ethernet decode according to the thresholds and proto- col settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1).

  • Page 589: Ethernet 100Base-T1 (Option R&S Rtp-K57)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) 12.8 Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) 100BASE-T1 is an Ethernet based protocol specialized for the needs of the automotive industry, such as in the automotive networking applications, enabling advanced safety, comfort and infotainment features within the automobile. Its specifications, with reference to IEEE Standard 802.3-2012, were developed by the OPEN (One-Pair Ether-Net) alliance under BroadR-Reach®.

  • Page 590: 100Base-T1 Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) – Symbol encoding is carried out via a one-dimensional (1D) PAM-3 encoder that converts the 3-bit groups into pairs of ternary symbols. These symbols are transmitted using three voltage levels (-1 V, 0 V and +1 V). One symbol is transmitted in each symbol period –...
  • Page 591 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) For general information on how to configure protocol parameters, see also: Chap- ter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings", on page 469. Reverse Defines the reversed signal settings. The reverse direction is optional and can be dis- abled.
  • Page 592 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Attenuation Sets the attenuation factor. It is used to de-amplify the reverse signal before subtract- ing it from the forward signal. The effective signal amplitude passed to the decoder is: Remote command: on page 1502 BUS<m>:HBTO:ATTN Polarity...
  • Page 593 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Remote command: on page 1505 BUS<m>:HBTO:SYMRate 12.8.2.2 100BASE-T1 Display Settings Access: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol = 100BASE-T1" > "Display" tab To enhance the decode possibilities of the 100BASE-T1 protocol, you can use an addi- tional setting in the "Display"...

  • Page 594: 100Base-T1 Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) 12.8.2.3 Configuring 100BASE-T1 Signals For configuration, assign the lines to the input channels and define the active states and the logical thresholds. Serial Bus Setup 1. Press the [Protocol] key on the front panel. 2.
  • Page 595 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Figure 12-42: 100BASE-T1 trigger event settings dialog Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ●...
  • Page 596 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) The frame contains addresses of the devices and MAC control information that define how to go about transmitting and receiving frames. IDLE ← Type Triggers on an idle frame. The frame is used for clock synchronization. Error ←...
  • Page 597 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Source address Sets the specified source address to be triggered on. The source address setup con- sists of the condition and one or two data patterns. The source address is the physical address of the device that sends the frame. "Condition"...
  • Page 598 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Remote command: on page 1508 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:LENGth:CONDition on page 1509 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:LENGth:MIN on page 1509 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:LENGth:MAX Frame check Sets the specified frame check to be triggered on. The frame check setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns.
  • Page 599 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Remote command: on page 1510 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:DATA:DCONdition on page 1511 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:DATA:DMIN on page 1511 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:DATA:DMAX Index Sets the specified value or range within this series of data that is considered for the analysis.

  • Page 600: 100Base-T1 Label List

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Remote command: on page 1513 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:ERRor:CRC SFD Error ← Errors Triggers on a frame with invalid Start Frame Delimiter (SFD). Remote command: on page 1513 TRIGger<m>:HBTO:ERRor:SFD 12.8.3.2 Triggering on 100BASE-T1 Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the 100BASE-T1 signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1.
  • Page 601 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table" and "Show binary signals". For a description of the display set- tings, see also Chapter 12.1.3, "Display", on page 470 The instrument captures and decodes the signal according to the standard definition...
  • Page 602 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Enable "Show details" in the decode table to display a more detailed analysis of the selected frame. All data bytes are listed (in hexadecimal format). Figure 12-44: 100BASE-T1 decode results table and details The content of the "Decode results"...

  • Page 603: Search On Decoded 100Base-T1 Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail. If "Zoom coupling" is enabled, the decode zoom and result table are synchronized; if you select a row in the result table, this result is shown in the decode zoom.
  • Page 604 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Type Selects the search type for 100BASE-T1 analysis. Remote command: on page 1519 SEARch:TRIGger:HBTO:TYPE Frame Start ← Type Searches for the start of frame. MAC Frame ← Type Searches for a Media Access Control (MAC) frame that matches the specified Destina- tion address,...
  • Page 605 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) FILLER ← Type Searches for a Filler frame. The frame is used to maintain transmission activity. IDLE ← Type Searches for an idle frame. The frame is used for clock synchronization. Error ←...
  • Page 606 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the source address pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). The bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern in any format, see Chapter 12.1.5, "Bit Pattern Editor", on page 476.
  • Page 607 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific frame check, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal") or a range. "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the frame check pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). The bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern in any format, see Chapter 12.1.5, "Bit Pattern Editor",...
  • Page 608 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific index, e.g. "Equal" or a range. "Index Min/Index" Defines the bit pattern of the index pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). The bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern in any format, see Chapter 12.1.5, "Bit Pattern Editor",...
  • Page 609 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Ethernet 100BASE-T1 (Option R&S RTP-K57) Remote command: on page 1526 SEARch:TRIGger:HBTO:ERRor:SFD 12.8.6.2 100BASE-T1 Search Results The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines. The "Show search zoom windows" function allows you to analyze the search results in more detail.

  • Page 610: Rffe (Option R&S Rtp-K40)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) 3. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to 100BASE-T1 (e.g. "SB1", unless already selected). The search dialog for 100BASE-T1 protocol analysis opens. 4. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 12.8.6, "Search on Decoded 100BASE-T1 Data",...
  • Page 611 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) External VIO supply Master Slave 1 (RFIC) (FEM 1) Slave 2 (FEM 2) Slave n (FEM n) Figure 12-45: RFFE bus structure with external VIO supply Command sequences Protocol messages are called command sequences in RFFE. The standard defines various command sequences to accomplish read and write access to slaves and to non-active masters.

  • Page 612: Rffe Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Command frame Address and data frames Command payload [Address frames] [Data frames] 4 bits 8 bits + P 8 bits + P 8 bits + P Figure 12-46: General structure of a RFFE Write command sequence Command frame Address and data frames Command payload...
  • Page 613 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side. See also: Chapter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings", on page 469. SCLK Source Sets the source of the clock line. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels.
  • Page 614 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) For triggering on a serial bus, analog or digital channel sources are required. Remote command: on page 1533 BUS<m>:RFFE:DATA:SOURce Thresholds Set the threshold values for digitization of signals for each line: the positive going threshold (V , upper value), the negative going threshold (V , lower value), and the...

  • Page 615: Rffe Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Timing Defines the idle time between the Bus Park Cycle (BP) and Sequence Start Condition (SSC). You can define a minimum time "Min gap". The standard defines a minimum of 10 ns to separate two subsequent command sequences.
  • Page 616 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ● The trigger source is "Serial bus": [Trigger] >...
  • Page 617 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Sequence Stop ← Type Triggers on the end of a command sequence, on the bus park cycle. Optionally, you can specify a slave address pattern or a slave address range to trigger only on command sequences that are sent to these slaves.
  • Page 618 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) You can refine the trigger condition: ● Set a slave address condition to trigger only on command sequences that are sent to the specified slaves. See: "Slave Addr." on page 621. ● Set a register address condition to trigger only on command sequences that write data to the specified register.
  • Page 619 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) ● Set a register address condition to trigger only on command sequences that write data to the specified register. See: "Address" on page 621 ● Set a data pattern condition to trigger on data patterns expected in the message. See: "Data"...
  • Page 620 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Extended Register Read Long ← Type Triggers on "Extended Register Write" command sequences. This sequence sends the byte count of data frames in the command payload, followed by 2 address frames with the address of the first extended register, and reads back up to 8 data frames.
  • Page 621 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) "Length error" Triggers on an incorrect length of the command sequence - when additional or missing bits are detected and the sequence of bits is not as expected. "Bus park Triggers on an incorrect bus park cycle - when the instrument expects error"...
  • Page 622 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) "Condition" Sets the operator to trigger on a specific address pattern ("Equal" or "Not equal") or an address range. "Address Defines the register address pattern for all operators that require one pattern. (Min)"...
  • Page 623 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Remote command: on page 1538 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:DATA:DCON on page 1539 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:DATA:DMIN on page 1540 TRIGger<m>:RFFE:DATA:DMAX Index Defines which data frames are relevant for the trigger. The setting is available for all "Extended Register" command sequences, which can transfer more than one data frame.

  • Page 624: Rffe Label List

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) 6. To refine the trigger settings, configure additional settings, which are available for many trigger types. For details, see Chapter 12.9.3.1, "RFFE Trigger Settings", on page 615. 12.9.4 RFFE Label List Label lists are protocol-specific. A label list file for RFFE contains slave addresses and/or register addresses and their symbolic names: ●...
  • Page 625 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Figure 12-48: RFFE label list in R&S RTP User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 05...

  • Page 626: Rffe Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Figure 12-49: Decoded RFFE signal with applied label list and results table For general information on the "Label List" tab, see Chapter 12.1.4, "Label Lists", on page 473. Remote command: ● on page 1544 BUS<m>:RFFE:SEQuence<n>:SYMBol? 12.9.5 RFFE Decode Results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded:...
  • Page 627 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Figure 12-50: Decoded RFFE signal and results table. The signal is triggered on sequence stop. A part of the decoded data is shown in a zoom diagram. Table 12-10: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State...

  • Page 628: Search On Decoded Rffe Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail. If "Zoom coupling" is enabled, the decode zoom and result table are synchronized; if you select a row in the result table, this result is shown in the decode zoom.
  • Page 629 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Type The search criterion is defined by "Type". All trigger types are also available for search. Additional search parameters are provided under "Detailed Search Parameter Setup". For details, see also "Type" on page 616. "Sequence Start"...
  • Page 630 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) "Extended Register Write" Searches for "Extended Register Write" command sequences. Addi- tional search parameters: ● Slave address, see "Slave Addr." on page 631 ● Byte count, see "Byte count" on page 631 ●...
  • Page 631 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Remote command: on page 1547 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:TYPE Slave Addr. Searches for a slave address or a slave address range. In command sequences transferred between masters, this is the non-BOM address. The slave address settings are the same as in the RFFE trigger setup, see "Slave Addr."...
  • Page 632 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Data Searches for a data pattern or an data word range. The setting is available for all "Extended Register" command sequences, which can transfer more than one data frame. The data settings are the same as in the RFFE trigger setup, see "Data"...
  • Page 633 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Remote command: on page 1551 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:ERRor:BP on page 1551 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:ERRor:LENGth on page 1552 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:ERRor:NOResponse on page 1552 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:ERRor:PARity on page 1552 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:ERRor:SSC on page 1552 SEARch:TRIGger:RFFE:ERRor:USEQuence 12.9.6.2 RFFE Search Results The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines.
  • Page 634 ® Protocol Analysis R&S RFFE (Option R&S RTP-K40) Figure 12-51: Results of a search for sequence start. All command sequences of the acquisition are found. Remote commands: ● on page 1553 SEARch:RESult:RFFE:FCOunt? ● on page 1553 SEARch:RESult:RFFE:SEQuence<m>:TYPE? ● on page 1554 SEARch:RESult:RFFE:SEQuence<m>:STATe? ●...

  • Page 635: D-Phy (Option R&S Rtp-K42)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) 2. Tap the "Source" button and select the serial bus that is set to RFFE. "Protocol" shows the RFFE icon. 3. Tap "Type" and select the search type. All trigger types are also available for search. 4.

  • Page 636: D-Phy Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) 12.10.2 D-PHY Configuration 12.10.2.1 D-PHY Configuration Settings Access: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol = D-PHY" Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side. See also: Chapter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings",...
  • Page 637 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) Permitted source selections are none, the analog, mathematical, and reference chan- nels. CP ← Source Connection Sets the source of the clock lane. Remote command: on page 1558 BUS<m>:DPHY:CP:SOURce DP0/DN0 ← Source Connection Selects the source of the low-power data lanes.
  • Page 638 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) Hysteresis Sets a value for the hysteresis of the respective lane. Remote command: on page 1561 BUS<m>:DPHY:CP:HSPeed:HYSTeresis on page 1561 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPZero:HSPeed:HYSTeresis on page 1561 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPONe:HSPeed:HYSTeresis on page 1561 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPTWo:HSPeed:HYSTeresis on page 1561 BUS<m>:DPHY:DPTHree:HSPeed:HYSTeresis Preset thresholds Presets the threshold and hysteresis values of the high-speed data lanes.
  • Page 639 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) Common display settings are explained in Chapter 12.1.3, "Display", on page 470. Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table.

  • Page 640: D-Phy Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) 2. At the left-hand side, select the vertical tab of the bus you want to set up. 3. Select the "Decode" tab. 4. Tap the "Protocol" button and select the protocol: "D-PHY". 5.
  • Page 641 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ● The trigger source is "Serial bus": [Trigger] >...
  • Page 642 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) HS Start of Packet ← Type Sets the trigger to the transmission start of a high-speed packet. HS End of Packet ← Type Sets the trigger to the transmission end of a high-speed packet. HS Packet Header ←...
  • Page 643 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) LP Lane Turnaround ← Type Sets the trigger to a low-power turnaround, a reversion of the transmission direction. LP HS Request ← Type Sets the trigger to a high-speed request. Virtual Channel Triggers on a specific virtual channel, an independent data stream for up to four periph- erals.
  • Page 644 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) Remote command: on page 1565 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:DTYPe:CONDition on page 1565 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:DTYPe:MAX on page 1565 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:DTYPe:MIN Word Count Sets the specified specific word count to be triggered on. The word count setup con- sists of the condition and one or two data patterns. "Condition"...
  • Page 645 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) For "Type">"LP Escape Mode": on page 1566 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESDTa:CONDition on page 1567 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESDTa:MAX on page 1567 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESDTa:MIN Data Index Data index sets the range within this series of the data value that is considered for the analysis.

  • Page 646: D-Phy Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) Remote command: on page 1566 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESCMode:CONDition on page 1566 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESCMode:MAX on page 1566 TRIGger<m>:DPHY:ESCMode:MIN 12.10.3.2 Triggering on D-PHY Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the D-PHY signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1.
  • Page 647 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) Figure 12-52: Decoded D-PHY short packet, single-ended probes The example in Figure 12-53 shows a decoded D-PHY signal and the result tables. Dif- ferential probes are used for the four data lanes "DP0", "DP1", "DP2" and "DP3". Figure 12-53: Decoded D-PHY 4 channel frame with length error, result tables, differential probes User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─...
  • Page 648 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) Table 12-11: Content of the decode result table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Start Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point Stop Time of frame stop in relation to the trigger point Frame Type Frame type Number of virtual channels...

  • Page 649: Search On Decoded D-Phy Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) 12.10.5 Search on Decoded D-PHY Data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
  • Page 650 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) Remote command: on page 1582 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:HSVC Data Type Searches for a specific data type. The data type setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific data type ("Equal" or "Not equal") or a data type range.
  • Page 651 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the data value pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). The bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern in any format, see Chapter 12.1.5, "Bit Pattern Editor", on page 476.
  • Page 652 ® Protocol Analysis R&S D-PHY (Option R&S RTP-K42) "Data Max" The second data pattern is required to specify a range with conditions "In range" and "Out of range". Remote command: on page 1579 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:ESCMode:CONDition on page 1579 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:ESCMode:MAX on page 1579 SEARch:TRIGger:DPHY:ESCMode:MIN 12.10.5.2 D-PHY Search Results...

  • Page 653: M-Phy And Usb Ssic (Option R&S Rtp-K44 And -K64)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) 3. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to D-PHY (e.g. "SB1", unless already selected). 4. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 12.10.5.1, "D-PHY Search Setup", on page 649.

  • Page 654: M-Phy Basic

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) 12.11.1 M-PHY Basic This chapter provides an overview of the characteristics of the M-PHY and UniPro pro- tocols. 12.11.1.1 Data Transfer M-PHY words are always 10 bits long (both data and control words). For UniPro, they have variable lengths that depend on the frame type.

  • Page 655: M-Phy Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) ● Stage 4: merges the data lanes and finalizes the decoding to the UniPro data frames. This stage involves the Lane Merger, PDU Sync Detector, Shift Decode and Dynamic Data unit Decoder.
  • Page 656 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Remote command: on page 1588 BUS<m>:MPHY:DLANes Lane 0 / Lane 1 / Lane 2 / Lane 3: Channel Select the signal sources for the logical lanes. Remote command: on page 1589 BUS<m>:MPHY:DZERo:SOURce on page 1589...
  • Page 657 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Common display settings are explained in Chapter 12.1.3, "Display", on page 470. Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table.

  • Page 658: M-Phy Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) 5. Tap "Variant" and select the protocol. 6. Enter the number of "Lanes". 7. Select the source "Channel" for each lane. 8. Enter the "Thresholds" for each lane. 9.
  • Page 659 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Make sure that: ● The data sources of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Configuration" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Setup" tab. ●...
  • Page 660 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) DL PDU SOF ← Type Triggers on a UniPro Downlink Protocol Data Unit (DL PDU) Start Of Frame (SOF) that matches the specified TC, Data Index condition. DL PDU COF ←...
  • Page 661 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) DL PDU EOF ← Type Triggers on a UniPro DL PDU End Of Frame (EOF) frame that matches the specified condition. DL PDU NAC ← Type Triggers on a UniPro DL PDU Negative Acknowledgment Control (NAC) frame that matches the specified RReq condition.
  • Page 662 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) PACP ← Type Triggers on a UniPro PHY Adapter Control Protocol (PACP) frame that matches the specified PACP Begin, PACP Function ID, Data, Index condition. This control frame is used mainly for power mode change and L1.5 link management. It is also used in scrambling request.
  • Page 663 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) LCC Type Selects the type of LCC command to be triggered on. "Any LCC Command" All the available LCC commands "HIBERN8-SLEEP" Switches the power-saving state to ultra-low power without configura- tion loss.
  • Page 664 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific word, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal" or a range. "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the word pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1;...
  • Page 665 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Data Sets the specified data to be triggered on. The data setup consists of the condition and one or two data patterns. "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific data, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal") or a range.
  • Page 666 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific FSN, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal" or a range. "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the FSN pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1;...
  • Page 667 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) RReq is used for requesting the remote end to reinitialize its Transmit (TX) Physical Layer (PHY) while CReq is used for requesting flow control information for the corre- sponding from the remote end.
  • Page 668 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) "Condition" Defines the operator to set a specific PACP Begin, e.g. "Equal" or "Not Equal" or a range. "Data Min/Data" Defines the bit pattern of the data value pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1;...
  • Page 669 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) This error means that the waveform violates the reserved field according to the specifi- cation. For example, a DL_PDU_AFC frame requires that the two bits before and three bits after the FSN field to be reserved and set as 0.
  • Page 670 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Remote command: on page 1605 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:ERRor:LENGth 12.11.3.2 Triggering on M-PHY Prerequisite: A bus is configured for the M-PHY signal to be analyzed. For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1.
  • Page 671 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Error types: Item name, Enable The table lists the error types you can trigger on. Select the required errors in the "Enable" column. Remote command: on page 1634 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:ERENable on page 1634 TRIGger<m>:MPHY:SSIC:ERRor<n>:ENABle...
  • Page 672 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) "Condition" Defining specific data or a data range requires to set the operator to one of the following conditions: equal, not equal, less than, less than or equal, greater than, greater than or equal, in range, out of range. "Min"...

  • Page 673: M-Phy Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the "Serial bus" trigger source. 4. Tap "Serial bus" and select the serial bus that is set to SSIC, e.g.: The "Protocol"...
  • Page 674 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) green brackets [...] = start and end of frame yellow frame header = burst red frame header = frame containing error (also reported in the results table) dark blue = data before synchronization (M-PHY frame) / line init (LCC frame) orange...
  • Page 675 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Figure 12-56: Decoded SSIC signal with result tables Table 12-12: Content of the decode result table Column Description Frame Frame count State Overall state of the frame indicating, for example, if the frame is valid or invalid Start Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point Stop...

  • Page 676: Search On Decoded M-Phy Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Export of decode results You can export the decode results to a CSV or HTML file: 1. Press the [Save Recall] key on the left. 2. Select the "Waveforms/Results" tab > "Numeric" subtab. 3.
  • Page 677 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Type Selects the search type for the selected protocol. Remote command: on page 1613 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:TYPE Start of frame ← Type Searches for the start of an M-PHY or a UniPro frame. Burst ←...
  • Page 678 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) LCC ← Type Searches for an M-PHY Line Control Command (LCC) frame that matches the speci- fied LCC Type or any WORD condition. This control frame is used for configuring the line to a different state or mode depend- ing on the LCC type.
  • Page 679 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) DL PDU EOF ← Type Searches for a UniPro DL PDU End Of Frame (EOF) that matches the specified condition. DL PDU NAC ← Type Searches for a UniPro DL PDU Negative Acknowledgment Control (NAC) frame that matches the specified RReq condition.
  • Page 680 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) PACP ← Type Searches for a UniPro PHY Adapter Control Protocol (PACP) frame that matches the specified PACP Begin, PACP Function ID, Data, Index condition. This control frame is used mainly for power mode change and L1.5 link management. It is also used in scrambling request.
  • Page 681 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Trigger Upper2 ← Type Searches for a Trigger Upper2 frame. This control frame is used for link startup sequence. Errors ← Type Searches for the specified error frame.
  • Page 682 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) "Reserved" Reserved bit command. These bits are reserved for future use. Remote command: on page 1614 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:LCCType WORD 1/WORD 2/WORD 3/WORD 4 Sets the specified words to be searched for. The setup for a word consists of the condi- tion and one or two word patterns.
  • Page 683 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) "Data" Defines the bit pattern of the TC pattern. In binary format, use the following characters: 1; 0; or X (do not care). The bit pattern editor helps you to enter the pattern in any format, see Chapter 12.1.5, "Bit Pattern Editor", on page 476.
  • Page 684 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Remote command: on page 1620 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:DATA:ICONdition on page 1621 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:DATA:IMIN on page 1621 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:DATA:IMAX Sets the specified Frame Sequence Number (FSN) to be searched for. The FSN setup consists of the condition and one or two FSN patterns.
  • Page 685 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Remote command: on page 1622 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CRC:CONDition on page 1623 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CRC:MIN on page 1623 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CRC:MAX Sets the specified Reset Link Request (RReq) or Credit Transmit Request (CReq) to be searched for.
  • Page 686 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Remote command: on page 1624 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CREDit:CONDition on page 1624 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CREDit:MIN on page 1625 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:CREDit:MAX PACP Begin Sets the specified PACP Begin to be searched for. The PACP Begin setup consists of the condition and one or two PACP Begin patterns.
  • Page 687 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Remote command: on page 1626 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:PFID:CONDition on page 1626 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:PFID:MIN on page 1627 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:PFID:MAX Errors Sets the type of error events to be searched for. Reserved Bit Error ← Errors Searches for reserved bit error.
  • Page 688 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) Remote command: on page 1628 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:ERRor:UNKNown Length Error ← Errors Searches for frames that violate the length according to the specification. Remote command: on page 1628 SEARch:TRIGger:MPHY:ERRor:LENGth 12.11.5.2 M-PHY Search Results The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by...
  • Page 689 ® Protocol Analysis R&S M-PHY and USB SSIC (Option R&S RTP-K44 and -K64) The search for events is set up in the following way: 1. Press [Search] or tap "Search" > "Setup" in the menu bar. 2. If the dialog box does not contain a search entry, tap the icon to create one, as described in "To create a user-defined search"...

  • Page 690: Custom: Manchester / Nrz (Option R&S Rtp-K50)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Search criteria Use the "Search criteria" dialog to define the search type. If you search for frame con- tent, define the frame type in which data is to be searched. You can define individual search parameters for the fields of the selected frame in the table below the "Search criteria".

  • Page 691: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Protocols

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) ● Custom Filter......................718 ● Custom: Manchester / NRZ Decode Results............720 ● Search on Decoded Custom Manchester / NRZ Data.......... 723 12.12.1 Custom: Manchester / NRZ Protocols "Manchester" coding is a self-clocked coding scheme also known as phase-shift keying (or phase encoding, PE).

  • Page 692: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Idle Conditions The state of the signal line in between messages is the idle condition. Manchester appears in practical standards with varying idle conditions: it can idle at the high, low, or middle voltage state.
  • Page 693 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side. Figure 12-57: Coding standard selection in the serial bus protocol configuration dialog For general information on how to configure protocol parameters, see also: Chap- ter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings",...
  • Page 694 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) "Manchester II" Selects the coding standard Manchester II, which is the inverted sig- nal of the coding standard Manchester. Optional "Timing settings" are "Bit Rate" (default: disabled, 10 Mbit/s) and "Gap time"...
  • Page 695 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) "NRZ Selects the coding standard NRZ unclocked. Unclocked" Obligatory "Timing settings" are "Bit Rate" (default 10 Mbit/s) and "Gap time" (default 10 µs), as shown in Figure 12-61. Figure 12-61: Custom serial bus coding configuration NRZ Unclocked Remote command: on page 1646 BUS<m>:CMSB:CODing...
  • Page 696 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Clock Source Defines the source for the custom serial bus clock signal (only available for the coding standard "NRZ Clocked"). Permitted source selections are the analog, mathematical, reference and digital chan- nels.
  • Page 697 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Clock Phase (Manchester) Defines the phase of the custom serial bus clock signal for the Manchester coding standards. The available settings are: "Auto Detect" Lets the decoder automatically select the method ("First Edge" or "Second Edge") for detecting the clock phase.
  • Page 698 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) When the serial bus trigger has been selected, the only permitted source selections are the analog channels "C1" – "C4", which are required for triggering. Math and Reference channels can only be selected, if no serial bus trigger is selected. Remote command: on page 1651 BUS<m>:CMSB:NRZ:ENBLe...
  • Page 699 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) "Threshold" Directly sets the threshold values. ● For Manchester: upper threshold in the upper field, lower thresh- old in the lower field. ● For NRZ Clocked: clock threshold in the upper field, data thresh- old in the middle field and enable threshold in the lower field.
  • Page 700 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) ● "Couple For Manchester and Manchester II coding, the upper and lower thresholds" thresholds are coupled to voltage values with the same magni- tude but opposite sign (positive for the upper threshold and nega- tive for the lower threshold).
  • Page 701 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Remote command: on page 1655 BUS<m>:CMSB:GAPTime:VALue 12.12.2.2 Frame Format Configuration This dialog enables you to describe the generic format and logical structure of typical protocols by creating customized frame descriptions of various structures and lengths. Figure 12-62: Example of a custom "DALI"...
  • Page 702 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Figure 12-63: Example of a custom "MVB" frame format description (frame 1 of 2) Figure 12-64: Example of a custom "ProfiBus Voltage" frame format description (frame 1 of 3) User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─...
  • Page 703 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Figure 12-65: Example of a crc, parity and block frame conditions Frames A frame format description (or frame description, for short) is represented by one "page" in this dialog. It can be created by clicking on "Add". If one or several frame descriptions already exist, the new frame description is then created at the end of the frame format description list (or frame list, for short).
  • Page 704 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) If no user-defined frame description should be suitable to identify an incoming frame, per default such a "missed" frame is reproduced as "Undescribed Bits" in the honey- comb display, as in the example in Figure 12-72.
  • Page 705 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Remote command: on page 1656 BUS<m>:CMSB:FRAMe<n>:CCOunt? on page 1656 BUS<m>:CMSB:FRAMe<n>:APPend Cell Name The strings in the column title describe cell names. They do not have to be unique; cell names are just for user support.
  • Page 706 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) "= (equal)" The equal operator (represented by the "=" sign) defines a pattern for the cell to match. Valid condition entries are characters that match the cell's defined Numeric Format, Order, and Count.
  • Page 707 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) "[ ] (array)" The array operator (represented by the "[" and "]" bracket signs) defines the number of permissible repetitions of the cell. Example: Fixed-Length Array: [n] The length parameter "n" is a decimal number > 0, which determines that the cell is repeated n times within the frame.
  • Page 708 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) "crc5usb(n-m)" The crc 5-bit operator performs a check for a 5\-bit CRC function using the polynomial as defined by the USB standard. n and m define the index range for the CRC check. For example, if the CRC shall check fields 1 to 4, the function shall be written "crc5usb(1-5)".
  • Page 709 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Remote command: on page 1658 BUS<m>:CMSB:FRAMe<n>:CELL<o>:FORMat Bit Order This defines, in which order the bits of a cell's Condition value are evaluated: either the most significant bit (MSB) or the least significant bit (LSB) first. Since the bit order is considered for the interpretation of the condition, you should specify MSB or LSB cor- rectly.
  • Page 710 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Note: To see more than the three selected results, bring up a full list of the states and values of all cells by activating "Show details" in the decode table dialog. For an exam- ple, see Figure 12-71.
  • Page 711 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) A suitable XML file as shown in Figure 12-66 is composed as follows: Header: <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> Root Element: <FrameDescription xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" Version="1" xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=".\Schema\FrameDescription.xsd"> The root element contains the "Frame Description" attributes, including a link for the fileFrameDescription.xsd.
  • Page 712 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) – "1" – "2" – "3" 12.12.2.4 Custom: Manchester / NRZ Display Settings Access: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol = Custom" > "Display" tab To enhance the decode possibilities of the custom serial protocol, you can use an addi- tional setting in the "Display"...

  • Page 713: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) 2. At the left-hand side, select the vertical tab of the serial bus (SB1–SB4) you want to set up. 3. Select the "Decode" tab. 4. Tap "Protocol" and select the protocol: "Custom". 5.
  • Page 714 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Figure 12-68: Custom serial bus trigger settings, here with NRZ Clocked and Pattern selected Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ●...
  • Page 715 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Figure 12-69: Custom serial bus: setting the trigger to frame start Pattern ← Type Specifies the pattern match conditions for a payload data check. The trigger is set to the first occurrence of a matching data bit pattern (which can be freely specified), start- ing after the minimum gap time, and after the detected start of the data frame.
  • Page 716 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) "Bit index" Sets the bit index (data position), or the start value of a bit index range. Default bit index value is 0, permitted values range from 0 to 65535.
  • Page 717 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Remote command: on page 1665 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:ADVanced:ERENable on page 1665 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:ADVanced:ERRor<n>:ENABle Frame type ← Advanced Selects the frame type for the custom bus trigger analysis. You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the "Trigger type dependent settings".

  • Page 718: Custom Filter

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) on page 1664 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:ADVanced:DOPerator on page 1664 TRIGger<m>:CMSB:ADVanced:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:DOPerator Index ← Advanced Defines for the selected field, how an index check is executed. "Condition" Defining a specific index or an index range requires to set the opera- tor to one of the following conditions: equal, in range.
  • Page 719 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Filter Enables filtering on a custom serial bus. Remote command: on page 1668 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:ENABle Frame type Selects the frame type for the custom bus filtering. You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the "Trigger type dependent settings".

  • Page 720: Custom: Manchester / Nrz Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Remote command: on page 1667 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:DMAX on page 1667 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:DMIN on page 1668 BUS<m>:CMSB:FILTer:DOPerator Index Defines for the selected field, how an index check is executed. This function is avalible only for array fields, see "Condition"...
  • Page 721 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Examples The example in Figure 12-71 shows decoded and binary signals of a custom serial bus. The format information of DALI is being used to display as a result. Note that activating "Show details"...
  • Page 722 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Column Description Result 2 cell content (as above) Result 3 cell content (as above) Table 12-14: Content of the "Decode results details" table Column Description Name Name of the cell (e.g. Start, Data) as specified in the Cell Name column of the "Frame Format"...

  • Page 723: Search On Decoded Custom Manchester / Nrz Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail. If "Zoom coupling" is enabled, the decode zoom and result table are synchronized; if you select a row in the result table, this result is shown in the decode zoom.
  • Page 724 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) Search criteria Use the "Search criteria" dialog to define the event types to be searched. Available event types are "Frame" and "Error". Individual search parameters, which do not depend on the coding standard and trigger settings of the custom serial bus, can be specified in the tabs below the "Search crite- ria"...
  • Page 725 ® Protocol Analysis R&S Custom: Manchester / NRZ (Option R&S RTP-K50) on page 1679 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:DMIN on page 1680 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DOPerator on page 1680 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:DOPerator on page 1681 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IMAX on page 1681 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:IMAX on page 1681 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IMIN on page 1681 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:IMIN on page 1681 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IOPerator on page 1681 SEARch:TRIGger:CMSB:IOPerator...

  • Page 726: 8B/10B (Option R&S Rtp-K52)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) The search dialog for custom serial bus protocol analysis is opened. 4. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 12.12.6.1, "Custom Manchester / NRZ Search Setup", on page 723. 5. To acquire a waveform, press [Single]. The R&S RTP performs a custom serial bus decode according to the thresholds and protocol settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1).

  • Page 727: The 8B/10B Code

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) 12.13.1 The 8b/10b Code The 8b10b is a code where an 8-bit parallel data input is mapped into a 10-bit output. This code achieves a DC-balance and bounded disparity and simultaneously allows a reasonable clock recovery.
  • Page 728 ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) See also: Chapter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings", on page 469. Signal type Selects the signal type that is used for the decoding. You can choose between a differ- ential and single-ended signal. Remote command: on page 1692 BUS<m>:EBTB:TYPE...
  • Page 729 ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) Full Autoset Starts software algorithms for determining the signal threshold levels and bitrate. See also Chapter 12.1.2, "Full Autoset", on page 470. Remote command: on page 1693 BUS<m>:EBTBFAUToscale Threshold High Sets the threshold high of the signal, if "Signal type" > "Differential". Remote command: on page 1689 BUS<m>:EBTB:DIFFerential:THRHigh...
  • Page 730 ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) Estimate Bitrate Starts a software algorithm for the automatic determination of the bitrate. Remote command: on page 1692 BUS<m>:EBTBBITDetermi Sync Symbol Selects the sync symbol, a control symbol used for low-level control functions. You can select one of the comma control symbols (K28.1, K28.5, K28.7) used for synchroniza- tion or you can enter a pattern.

  • Page 731: 8B/10B Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) Remote command: on page 1690 BUS<m>:EBTB:DISF 12.13.2.3 Configuring 8b/10b For configuration, you assign the line to the input channel, set the threshold, the bitrate, and the sync symbol. For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 12.13.2.1, "8b/10b Configuration Set- tings", on page 727.
  • Page 732 ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) Trigger Type 8b/10b Selects the type of condition to be triggered on. "Symbol" Triggers on a specified symbol or expression. "Error Condi- Triggers on the selected error conditions. tion" Remote command: on page 1695 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:TYPE Disparity error Triggers on disparity errors.
  • Page 733 ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) "Symbol" Sets a specific symbol. "Expression" Sets a series of symbols. Remote command: on page 1694 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:SSTYpe Format Selects the format of the symbol to be triggered on, if "Symbol Type" > "Symbol". Remote command: on page 1695 TRIGger<m>:EBTB:SYMFormat...

  • Page 734: 8B/10B Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Protocol] key and select the "Trigger" tab. 2. Press the "Select" button. The "Source" button is shown. 3. Tap the "Source" button and select the "Serial bus" trigger source. 4.
  • Page 735 ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) Table 12-15: Content of the decode result table Column Description Symbol Shows the index number of the symbol State Overall state of the symbol Start Time of the symbol start in relation to the trigger point K/D Code The K/D code 8-bit...

  • Page 736: Search On Decoded 8B/10B Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) ● Chapter 6.1.3, "Zooming for Details", on page 236 Export of decode results You can export the decode results to a CSV or HTML file: 1. Press the [Save Recall] key on the left. 2.
  • Page 737 ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) Search Type 8b/10b Selects the type of condition to be searched for. "Symbol" Searches for a specified symbol or expression. "Error Condi- Searches for the selected error conditions. tion" Remote command: on page 1701 SEARch:TRIGger:EBTB:TYPE Disparity error Searches for disparity errors.
  • Page 738 ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) "Expression" Sets a series of symbols. Remote command: on page 1700 SEARch:TRIGger:EBTB:SSTYpe Format Selects the format of the symbol to be searched for, if "Symbol Type" > "Symbol". Remote command: on page 1700 SEARch:TRIGger:EBTB:SYMFormat K/D Codes Symbol Selects the data character (Dx.y) or control character to bea searched for.
  • Page 739 ® Protocol Analysis R&S 8b/10b (Option R&S RTP-K52) 12.13.5.2 8b/10b Search Results The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines. The "Show search zoom windows" function allows you to analyze the search results in more detail.

  • Page 740: Mdio (Option R&S Rtp-K55)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) 4. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to 8b/10b (e.g. "SB1", unless already selected). 5. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 12.13.5.1, "8b/10b Search Setup", on page 736. 6.
  • Page 741 ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) Table 12-16: MDIO frame structure according to Clause 22 Management Frame Fields Frame PHYAD REGAD DATA IDLE WRITE 1...1 AAAAA RRRRR DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD READ 1...1 AAAAA RRRRR DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD Table 12-17: MDIO frame structure according to Clause 45 Management Frame Fields Frame PRTAD...

  • Page 742: Mdio Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) 12.14.2 MDIO Configuration 12.14.2.1 MDIO Configuration Settings Access: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = MDIO Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side. Figure 12-75: Serial bus MDIO protocol configuration dialog For general information on how to configure protocol parameters, see also: Chap-...
  • Page 743 ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) Thresholds MDIO defines two thresholds for each source line: ● Vih(min) is being used for the rising edge evaluation. This "h" (high) threshold is the minimum value for the signal to be identified as "1". If the signal value comes from a low state (hence, rising edge), the state remains to be considered as low ("0"), until it has risen above Vih(min).
  • Page 744 ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) Common display settings are explained in Chapter 12.1.3, "Display", on page 470. Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table.

  • Page 745: Mdio Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) 7. In the protocol "Configuration" tab, select "Decode" to activate the decode function- ality. For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 12.14.2.1, "MDIO Configuration Set- tings", on page 742. 12.14.3 MDIO Trigger 12.14.3.1 MDIO Trigger Settings Access: [Protocol] >...
  • Page 746 ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) Figure 12-76: MDIO trigger event settings dialog "Frame Start" Sets the trigger to the start of frame (SOF) field. The start of frame condition and the trigger instant is the end of the preamble. Trigger pattern: preamble (32 bits "1") There are no additional parameters to be specified.
  • Page 747 ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) "Data" Sets the trigger to the data field. For more information on the data condition, see MDIO in the Ethernet standard. The trigger instant is at the end of the frame after the last data bit, as indicated in the GUI. Note: All data triggers are always at the end of the frame, even if the specified pattern to trigger for is at a different position within the data word.

  • Page 748: Mdio Label List

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) PHYAD/PRTAD ← MDIO Trigger Type Sets the physical address or port address (5 bits) of the frame pattern; available only in trigger type "Data". Remote command: on page 1708 TRIGger<m>:MDIO:PHYS REGAD/DEVAD ← MDIO Trigger Type Sets the register address or device address (5 bits) of the frame pattern;...

  • Page 749: Mdio Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) Example: MDIO label list CSV file @PROTOCOL_NAME = mdio 0x0B, KSZ9031MNX 0x0C, KSZ8051MNLU 0x0E, KSZ8721CL 0x0F, KSZ8721SL 0x1A, KSZ8721BL 0x1B, KSZ8721BT For general information on the "Label List" tab, see Chapter 12.1.4, "Label Lists", on page 473.
  • Page 750 ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) Figure 12-77: Decoded and binary MDIO signal trace, and decode results table green brackets [...] = start and end of frame blue frame = frame ok red frame = frame containing an error grey = preamble (PRE), start pattern (ST), operation code (OP = frame type), or turnaround (TA) fields...
  • Page 751 ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) Column Description Operation code (= Frame type), 2 bits ● "00" = Address frame (in Clause 45, only) ● "01" = Write frame (in Clause 22 or Clause 45) ● "10" = Read frame (in Clause 22) or Post Read frame (in Clause 45) ●...

  • Page 752: Search On Decoded Mdio Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) Export of decode results You can export the decode results to a CSV or HTML file: 1. Press the [Save Recall] key on the left. 2. Select the "Waveforms/Results" tab > "Numeric" subtab. 3.
  • Page 753 ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) Available event types are "Frame Start", "Frame Stop", and "Data". Only if search criteria type "Data" is selected, individual search parameters can be specified in the tabs below the "Search criteria" dialog. For these parameters, see "ST"...
  • Page 754 ® Protocol Analysis R&S MDIO (Option R&S RTP-K55) For an introduction to search results, see: ● Chapter 10.1.2, "Search Results", on page 402 ● Chapter 10.4, "Result Presentation", on page 419 Remote commands: ● on page 1718 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WCOunt? ● on page 1717 SEARch:RESult:MDIO:WORD<m>:STATe? ●...

  • Page 755: Usb (Option R&S Rtp-K60)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) There are no additional search criteria to be specified. 4. To acquire a waveform, press [Single]. The R&S RTP performs an MDIO decode according to the thresholds and protocol settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1). 5.
  • Page 756 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) and mass storage media were enabled to exchange data at faster rates (up to 480 Mbit/s). Also, the high-speed protocol HSIC (High Speed Inter Chip) is used for the communication between on-board devices. Figure 12-79: USB Topology: mass storage device, printer, USB hub, and mouse (human interface device) connected to a USB host More information, including the USB specification, is available online within the web...
  • Page 757 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) ● Bit stuffing: a zero (0) is inserted after every 6 consecutive ones (111111). This ensures sufficient transitions to keep the phase-locked loop (PLL) synchronized and locked onto the data stream. ● Little Endian scheme: both multiple bits and multiple bytes are transmitted with the least significant bit/byte (LSB) sent first, while the most significant bit/byte (MSB) is sent last.
  • Page 758 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) and full speed (USB 1.x), it is 8 bits long, encoded as "KJKJKJKK". At high speed (USB 2.0 and HSIC), it is up to 32 bits long, encoded as "KJKJKJKJKJKJ...KK". The SYNC field is used to synchronize the clock of the receiver with that of the trans- mitter.
  • Page 759 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) CRC5 (which is 5 bits long) over ADDR and ENDP (or the frame number field, in case of SOF); data packets (DATA0, DATA1, MDATA, DATA2) are followed by a CRC16 (which is 16 bits long) over the data field. No CRC is used for handshake packets.

  • Page 760: Usb 2.0 Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) SYNC ADDR ENDP CRC5 ● Start of frame packets (SOF) have the following format: SYNC Frame number CRC5 ● Data packets have the following format: SYNC Data CRC16 ● Handshake packets have the following format: SYNC ●...
  • Page 761 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side. Figure 12-83: Serial bus protocol configuration dialog For general information on how to configure protocol parameters, see also: Chap- ter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings",...
  • Page 762 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) "USB Full speed" Selects USB 2.0 full speed protocol (12 Mbit/s). Figure 12-85: USB full speed protocol configuration "USB High speed" Selects USB high-speed protocol (480 Mbit/s). As the signal is differ- ential, there is only one source and one threshold to be defined.
  • Page 763 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) D+, D- Define the source settings for the D+ and the D- data signals in USB low speed and USB full speed protocols. You can select analog channels "C1" to "C4", and also active math and reference waveforms as source.

  • Page 764: Usb 2.0 Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) 12.15.2.2 Configuring USB Signals For configuration, assign the lines to the input channels and define the active states and the logical thresholds. Serial Bus Setup 1. Press the [Protocol] key on the front panel. 2.
  • Page 765 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) In this section, all trigger settings are described. Their availability on the instrument depends on the selected USB 2.0 protocol type and trigger type. The user interface of the instrument displays only appropriate settings and guides you through the trigger setup.
  • Page 766 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) End of packet ← Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to the EOP (end of packet) field. The trigger instant is the beginning of the EOP field. Reset ← Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to the Reset field.
  • Page 767 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) Data ← Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to one out of four different data trigger types: DATA0, DATA1, DATA2, or MDATA. "Data" on page 768 Handshake ← Trigger type USB Sets the trigger to one out of four different handshake trigger types: ACK, NAK, STALL, or NYET.
  • Page 768 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) You can refine the trigger condition: ● "PID error check" on page 771 ● "End Point check" on page 771 ● "Address check" on page 772 SOF ← Token For the trigger token type "SOF", the following conditions can be set: You can refine the trigger condition: ●...
  • Page 769 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) You can refine the trigger condition: ● "PID error check" on page 771 ● "Payload check" on page 772 Remote command: on page 1725 TRIGger<m>:USB:DATA Handshake Sets the trigger to one out of four different handshake types: ●...
  • Page 770 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) If no additional conditions are set, the trigger instant is after the PID. If the PID error check is selected: ● if an error is found in the PID's complementary form, the trigger is set immediately after the 8 bit of the PID ●...
  • Page 771 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) You can refine the trigger condition: ● "Address check" on page 772 ● "End Point check" on page 771 ● "PID error check" on page 771 Error condition Sets the trigger in case of one of the following eight different error condition types. ●...
  • Page 772 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) "Max" Sets the end value of an endpoint range if "Condition" (TRIGger<m>:USB:ECONdition) is set to INRange or OORange. Remote command: on page 1732 TRIGger<m>:USB:WEND on page 1726 TRIGger<m>:USB:ECONdition on page 1727 TRIGger<m>:USB:EMIN on page 1727 TRIGger<m>:USB:EMAX Address check...
  • Page 773 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) "Condition" Defining a specific frame number or a frame number range requires to set the operator to one of the following: equal, not equal, less than, less than or equal, greater than, greater than or equal, in range, out of range.
  • Page 774 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) "Min" Specifies an SEU value, or sets the start value of an SEU value range. "Max" Sets the end value of an SEU value range if "Condition" (TRIGger<m>:USB:SCONdition) is set to INRange or OORange. Remote command: on page 1733 TRIGger<m>:USB:WSEU...

  • Page 775: Usb 2.0 Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) 12.15.4 USB 2.0 Decode Results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Decode" tab, enable "Decode". 2. In the "Protocol" dialog > "Display" tab, select additional result display settings: "Show decode table"...
  • Page 776 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) The example in Figure 12-90 shows a simulated USB high-speed message. A Token SETUP packet has been decoded, which contains a CRC5 error. The next event is a Token IN packet and an incomplete MDATA packet. Note that an incomplete packet is also decoded, as long as sample data are available.
  • Page 777 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) Figure 12-91: USB HSIC protocol: decoded and binary signal, and decode results green brackets [...] = start and end of packet blue packet = packet ok green packet = data packet ok red packet = error condition yellow...

  • Page 778: Search On Decoded Usb 2.0 Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) Remote command: ● on page 1351 BUS<m>:ZCOupling For an introduction to zoom settings and setup, see: ● Chapter 6.1.2, "Zoom Settings", on page 232 ● Chapter 6.1.3, "Zooming for Details", on page 236 Export of decode results You can export the decode results to a CSV or HTML file: 1.
  • Page 779 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) Individual search parameters (which do not depend on the USB protocol type and trig- ger settings), can be specified in the tabs below the "Search criteria" dialog. Remote command: on page 1749 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:SSOP on page 1751 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:STOKen...
  • Page 780 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) You can refine the search condition: ● "Address check" on page 783 ● "End Point check" on page 783 For "SOF" tokens, the additional search parameter is "Frame number check". You can refine the search condition: ●...
  • Page 781 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) To search for payload in any data packet type, a data pattern and optionally a packet position have to be specified. You can refine the search condition: ● "Payload check" on page 784 Remote command: on page 1742 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:DATA...
  • Page 782 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) ● "ET check" on page 785 For "PING", additional search parameters are "Address check" and "End Point check". You can refine the search condition: ● "Address check" on page 783 ● "End Point check" on page 783 Remote command: on page 1750...
  • Page 783 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) "Glitch Error" Searches for glitch errors (errors in the bit period, see USB standard for the definition of glitch). Remote command: on page 1745 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:GLITcherror Address check Enables the search for an address that meets specific conditions. "Condition"...
  • Page 784 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) Remote command: on page 1753 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:WFRN on page 1745 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:FCONdition on page 1745 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:FMIN on page 1745 SEARch:TRIGger:USB:FMAX Payload check Enables the search for a payload data pattern that meets specific conditions. "Condition"...
  • Page 785 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) SEU check Enables the search for an SEU that meets specific conditions. (For SEU, see "SEU check" on page 773.) "Condition" Defining a specific SEU value or an SEU value range requires to set the operator to one of the following: equal, not equal, less than, less than or equal, greater than, greater than or equal, in range, out of range.
  • Page 786 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB (Option R&S RTP-K60) ● on page 1758 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:STARt? ● on page 1759 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:STOP? ● on page 1755 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:ADDRess? ● on page 1756 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:DATA? ● on page 1755 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:CRC? ● on page 1756 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:ENDPoint? ● on page 1756 SEARch:RESult:USB:PACKet<m>:ET? ●...

  • Page 787: Usb 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S Rtp-K61)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) 4. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 12.15.5.1, "USB 2.0 Search Setup", on page 778. 5. To acquire a waveform, press [Single]. The R&S RTP performs a USB 2.0 decode according to the thresholds and proto- col settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1).

  • Page 788: The Usb 3.1 Protocol

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) For analysis, USB 3.1 encoded signals can be triggered, decoded and searched. This chapter describes: ● The USB 3.1 Protocol................... 788 ● USB 3.1 Configuration..................796 ● USB 3.1 Trigger....................
  • Page 789 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) D = USB 3.0 / USB 3.1 shielded twisted pair 1 = Voltage bus V power supply pin, +5 V 2 = Differential data signal D- 3 = Differential data signal D+ 4 = Ground pin for power return 5 = SuperSpeed receiver differential pair Rx- 6 = SuperSpeed receiver differential pair Rx+...
  • Page 790 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) Specific protocol features Key features of USB 3.1 Gen 1 that are addressed by option R&S RTP-K61 include: ● Since 5 Gbps is too fast for serial pattern triggering, the option uses a search- based software trigger ●...
  • Page 791 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) ● DPH - = Data Packet Header, containing a type field, the data packet’s address, route string, length, and other information about the packet, including a 2- byte checksum (CRC-16). ●...
  • Page 792 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) ● PCNR - Port Configuration Response = This link management packet is sent by the upstream port in response to a Port Configuration and indicates its acceptance or rejection. ●...
  • Page 793 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) ● ULMP - Unknown LMP = A Link Management Packet is a type of header packet primarily used to manage links by communicating information between links part- ners. LMPs only travel between pairs of directly connected ports. ●...
  • Page 794 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) Frame Field3 Field4 Field5 Field6 Field7 Field8 Fld.9 Field10 Fld.11 Port Configuration SubType Response Code Rsvd Rsvd Rsvd Response STALL Rsvd Device Address SubType Rsvd EPTNum Rsvd Rsvd Set Link Function SubType Rsvd Rsvd...
  • Page 795 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 05...

  • Page 796: Usb 3.1 Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) Table 12-25: Frames without additional fields other than in this table Frame Field1 Field2 Field3 Field4 Field5 Field6 Fld.8 Field9 BCNT BERC BDAT BDAT BERC BERC BRST BRST Data Packet Payload HPSTART Data DPPEND...
  • Page 797 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) 12.16.2.1 USB 3.1 Configuration Settings Access: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = USB3 Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side. Figure 12-94: Serial bus protocol configuration dialog For general information on how to configure protocol parameters, see also: Chap-...
  • Page 798 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) Thresholds Sets the threshold values for digitization of the analog signals. The USB 3.1 standard uses 2-state signals with an upper and a lower voltage level. Permitted thresholds values are in the range of -2 V to +2 V, the default is -40 mV to +40 mV.

  • Page 799: Usb 3.1 Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) 8. Set the logical thresholds: Either enter user-defined values directly in the "Thresh- old" fields, or set the thresholds to the middle reference levels with "Auto thresh- olds". 9. Select "Decode" to activate the decode functionality. For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 12.16.2.1, "USB 3.1 Configuration Settings",...
  • Page 800 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ●...
  • Page 801 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) Remote command: on page 1769 TRIGger<m>:USBThree:FIENable on page 1769 TRIGger<m>:USBThree:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:ENABle Data Defines for the selected field, how a data check is executed. "Condition" Defining specific data or a data range requires to set the operator to one of the following conditions: equal, not equal, less than, less than or equal, greater than, greater than or equal, in range, out of range.

  • Page 802: Usb 3.1 Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) For the basic trigger settings, proceed in the following way: 1. Press the [Protocol] key and select the "Trigger" tab. 2. Press the "Select" button. The "Source" button is shown. 3.
  • Page 803 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) Figure 12-96: USB 3.1 Gen 1 protocol: decoded and binary signal = Sublink Speed frame = Data Packet Header (DPH) frame = Data Packet Payload frame Green brackets [...] = Start and end of frame Dark purple field = Route string Green field...
  • Page 804 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) Figure 12-97: USB 3.1 Gen 1 protocol: decoded and binary signal, and decode results Table 12-27: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame, for example "OK" or "Incomplete" Start Start time of the frame Stop...
  • Page 805 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) If a frame is partially outside of the acquisition window, it cannot be completely deco- ded. However, as long as sufficient sample data are available, incomplete frames are partially decoded and do not appear as errors. The trigger instant is the last criterion that is fulfilled.

  • Page 806: Search On Decoded Usb 3.1 Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) ● on page 1777 BUS<m>:USBThree:RESult:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:VAL? ● on page 1777 BUS<m>:USBThree:RESult:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:FVAL? 12.16.5 Search on Decoded USB 3.1 Data Using the search functionality, you can find various events in the decoded data. You can find the same events that you can trigger on, and even many more, since several event types can also be combined.
  • Page 807 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) Figure 12-98: Example of search criteria for frame content in status frames You can define individual search parameters for the fields of the selected frame in the table below the "Search criteria". To specify these parameters, select a field in the table and define the data and/or index operators and values, or the bit state.
  • Page 808 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) on page 1783 SEARch:TRIGger:USBThree:IMAX on page 1783 SEARch:TRIGger:USBThree:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IMAX 12.16.5.2 USB 3.1 Search Results To get search results, "Enable" the search in the "Control" section of the "Search Setup" dialog. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog to better see the "Search Results"...
  • Page 809 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USB 3.1 Generation 1 (Option R&S RTP-K61) 12.16.5.3 Searching USB 3.1 Data Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the USB 3.1 Gen 1 signal to be decoded and analyzed. The search for events is set up in the following way: 1.

  • Page 810: Usbpd (Option R&S Rtp-K63)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) 12.17 USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) R&S RTP-K63 is a firmware option that enables the R&S RTP to analyze Universal Serial Bus Power Delivery (USBPD) signals. For analysis, USBPD encoded signals can be triggered, decoded and searched. This chapter describes: ●...
  • Page 811 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) Frame packet types All frame types are listed below. The frames listed above consist of individual sets of fields. Some frames only contain one field, others are much longer. The frame types are sorted according to the message type. Table 12-29: Frame packet types SCPI Description...

  • Page 812: Usbpd Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) 12.17.2 USBPD Configuration 12.17.2.1 USBPD Configuration Settings Access: [Protocol] key > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = "USBPD" Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side. See also: Chapter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings",...
  • Page 813 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) Hyst Sets a value for the hysteresis of the data. Remote command: on page 1788 BUS<m>:USBPd:HYSTeresis Current advertisment thresholds The signal level provides information about the current advertisement between the bursts. These thresholds determine the levels at which the current advertisement modes are defined.
  • Page 814 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) Common display settings are explained in Chapter 12.1.3, "Display", on page 470. Decode layer Selects the decode layer. Decoding is performed in several steps, and the end results are presented in the decode table.

  • Page 815: Usbpd Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) 8. Enable "Decode", if available. 12.17.3 USBPD Trigger If you need information on how to get started with triggering on USBPD signals, see Chapter 12.17.3.2, "Triggering on USBPD", on page 817. Otherwise proceed with the USBPD trigger settings.
  • Page 816 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) Frame Type Selects the frame type for the USBPD analysis. For the available packet types, see "Frame packet types" on page 811. You can define individual checking parameters for the fields listed in the "Trigger type dependent settings".
  • Page 817 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) on page 1794 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:DMIN on page 1794 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:FRAMe<n>:FLD<o>:DMIN Data BitState Defines the bit state to be checked for the selected field. Permitted bit states are "1", "0" or "X" (don't care). Remote command: on page 1793 TRIGger<m>:USBPd:BIT on page 1793...

  • Page 818: Usbpd Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) For information on how to proceed with the configuration settings, see Chap- ter 12.17.3.1, "USBPD Trigger Settings", on page 815. 12.17.4 USBPD Decode Results When the configuration of the serial bus is complete, the signal can be decoded: 1.
  • Page 819 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) Figure 12-101: USBPD protocol: decoded and binary signal Green brackets [...] = Start and end of frame Dark green field = Header Light blue fields = CRC checksum Orange fields = Data bits The example in USBPD protocol: decoded and binary signal, and decode results shows the same simulated USBPD message as in...
  • Page 820 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) Figure 12-102: USBPD protocol: decoded and binary signal, and decode results Table 12-30: Content of the "Decode results" table Column Description State Overall state of the frame Start Time of frame start Stop Time of frame stop Frame Type...

  • Page 821: Search On Decoded Usbpd Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail. If "Zoom coupling" is enabled, the decode zoom and result table are synchronized; if you select a row in the result table, this result is shown in the decode zoom.
  • Page 822 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) Before you can start the search, you have to configure the bus correctly and acquire decoded data. To search on decoded data, set the search source to "SerBus" for the configured proto- col.
  • Page 823 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) on page 1803 SEARch:TRIGger:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:BIT on page 1804 SEARch:TRIGger:USBPd:DMAX on page 1804 SEARch:TRIGger:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DMAX on page 1804 SEARch:TRIGger:USBPd:DMIN on page 1804 SEARch:TRIGger:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DMIN on page 1805 SEARch:TRIGger:USBPd:DOPerator on page 1805 SEARch:TRIGger:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:DOPerator on page 1805 SEARch:TRIGger:USBPd:IMAX on page 1805 SEARch:TRIGger:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:IMAX on page 1806...
  • Page 824 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) Figure 12-103: Search on USBPD frame The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines. The "Show search zoom windows" function allows you to analyze the search results in more detail.
  • Page 825 ® Protocol Analysis R&S USBPD (Option R&S RTP-K63) ● on page 1809 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:TYPE? ● on page 1808 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:STATus? ● on page 1809 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:STARt? ● on page 1809 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:STOP? ● on page 1810 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:VAL? ● on page 1808 SEARch:RESult:USBPd:FRAMe<m>:FLD<n>:FVAL? 12.17.5.3 Searching USBPD Data Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the USBPD signal to be decoded and ana- lyzed.

  • Page 826: Pcie Gen 1/2 (Option R&S Rtp-K72)

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) 4. Specify search criteria according to Chapter 12.17.5.1, "USBPD Search Setup", on page 822. 5. To acquire a waveform, press [Single]. The R&S RTP performs a USBPD decode according to the thresholds and protocol settings of the associated serial bus source (here in our example SB1).

  • Page 827: The Pcie Protocol

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) 12.18.1 The PCIe Protocol The PCIe is a high-speed serial computer expansion bus standard. The communication between two PCIe devices is performed through logical connec- tions called links. Each link consists of several lanes. The lanes contain one differential signaling pair for receiving data and the other for transmitting it.
  • Page 828 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) SCPI name Description Type SWP32 / SWP64 Unconditional Swap AtomicOp Request for 32 bit/ 64-bit addresssing packet for- CAS32 / CAS64 Compare and Swap AtomicOp Request for 32 bit/ 64-bit addresssing packet for- LPRFX Local TLP Prefix EPRFX...

  • Page 829: Pcie Gen 1/2 Configuration

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) 12.18.2 PCIe Gen 1/2 Configuration 12.18.2.1 PCIe Gen 1/2 Configuration Settings Access: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab > "Protocol" = "PCIe Gen 1/2" Make sure that the tab of the correct serial bus is selected on the left side. See also: Chapter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings",...
  • Page 830 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Remote command: on page 1813 BUS<m>:PCIE:LNKW Descrambling Enables descrambling of the data. Remote command: on page 1812 BUS<m>:PCIE:DSCRambling Lane 0/1/2/3 Select the signal sources for the logical lanes. Usually, the source is one of the analog channels. Reference and math waveforms are available as source if the trigger source is one of the analog channels but not the serial bus.
  • Page 831 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) CDR Summary Displays a summary of the CDR values. You can set these settings in the "CDR" tab, Chapter 12.18.3, "PCIe Gen 1/2 CDR Configuration Settings", on page 832. 12.18.2.2 Display Settings Access: [Protocol] >...

  • Page 832: Pcie Gen 1/2 Cdr Configuration Settings

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) 12.18.2.3 Configuring PCIe Gen 1/2 For configuration, you assign the line to the input channel, set the threshold, the bitrate, and the sync symbol. For details on configuration settings, see Chapter 12.18.2.1, "PCIe Gen 1/2 Configura- tion Settings",...
  • Page 833 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Nominal bit rate Sets the quiescent frequency of the PLL. It corresponds to the data rate of the data stream from which the clock is to be recovered. Remote command: on page 1815 BUS<m>:CDR:BITRate PLL settings...

  • Page 834: Pcie Gen 1/2 Trigger

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Initial phase sync. Defines the phase reference for the first clock edge. "First sample" The first clock edge matches the first sample of the waveform at the left border of the display. "First data The first clock edge matches the first edge of the data signal.
  • Page 835 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ●...
  • Page 836 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) "Any type" Triggers on any transaction type. "Mem" Triggers on memory transaction type used for data transfers to mem- ory-mapped locations. "IO" Triggers on I/O transaction type used for data transfers to I/O-map- ped locations.
  • Page 837 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Requester ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Triggers on a requester ID, consisting of the requester's bus number, device number, and function number. Remote command: on page 1824 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:TLP:REID Device ID ← TLP (Transaction layer) Triggers on a device ID, a field that can be assigned a value by the vendor for classify- ing root complex register blocks (RCRB).
  • Page 838 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Remote command: on page 1823 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:TLP:CPID DLLP Type Sets the trigger to the type of DLLP. You can refine the settings for the different types according to their specifications. Remote command: on page 1821 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:TYPE DLLP Any Type conditions...
  • Page 839 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) VH FC ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a virtual hierarchies flow control presence. Remote command: on page 1820 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHFC Mixed Type ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on a mixed type presence.
  • Page 840 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Remote command: on page 1819 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:TLPT Credit Type ← MRInitFC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Triggers on any, data or header credit type. Remote command: on page 1818 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:CRET MRReset ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Specifies the conditions for the multi-root reset protocol trigger.
  • Page 841 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) "Any" Triggers on any credit type. "P" Triggers on posted requests. "NP" Triggers on non posted requests. "CPL" Triggers on completions. Remote command: on page 1818 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:DLLP:FCTL:CRET VC ID ← DLLP Init FC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC conditions Triggers on a virtual channel ID value.
  • Page 842 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) "Electrical Idle Triggers on an electrical idle exit ordered set. Exit OS" Triggers on a compliance pattern ordered set. "Compliance Pattern" Remote command: on page 1822 TRIGger<m>:PCIE:OSET:TYPE Error Condition Triggers on enabled error condition. "CRC16 error"...

  • Page 843: Pcie Gen 1/2 Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) 5. Tap "Trigger Type PCI express" and select the trigger type to be used for PCIe Gen 1/2 protocol analysis. 6. Depending on the selected trigger type, more setup conditions can be specified. For information on how to proceed with the configuration settings, see Chap- ter 12.18.4.1, "PCIe Gen 1/2 Trigger...
  • Page 844 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Figure 12-104: PCIeGen 1/2 protocol: decoded and binary signal Green brackets [...] = Start and end of frame Dark green = TLP type packet Green = DLLP type packet Red field = Error Enable "Show details"...
  • Page 845 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Figure 12-105: PCIe Gen 1/2 protocol: decoded and binary signal, and decode results Upper table = Decode results table, see Table 12-32 Lower table = Decode results details, see Table 12-33 Table 12-32: Content of the "Decode results"...

  • Page 846: Pcie Gen 1/2 Search

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Table 12-33: Content of the "Details" table Column Description State State of the field Type Field type Hex-Value Hexadecimal value of the field Formatted Formatted content of the field Zooming on decoded results The zoom functions allow you to analyze the decode results in more detail.
  • Page 847 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Make sure that: ● The data source(s) of the serial bus are channel signals: [Protocol] > "Decode" tab. ● The trigger sequence is set to "A only": [Trigger] > "Sequence" tab. ●...
  • Page 848 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) "DLLP (Data Sets the search on a defined type of the data link layer packet. link layer)" "Ordered Sets" Sets the search on a defined ordered set. "Error Condi- Sets the search on a selection of error conditions. tion"...
  • Page 849 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Remote command: on page 1844 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:TCHN Ordering ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for an ordering. The ordering can be relaxed or strong. Remote command: on page 1843 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:ORDE Snoop ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a snoop state.
  • Page 850 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Message Code ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a specific message code. Remote command: on page 1843 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:MSGC Status ← TLP (Transaction layer) Searches for a completion status. Remote command: on page 1842 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:TLP:CPLS Completer ID ←...
  • Page 851 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Phase ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a phase state. Remote command: on page 1835 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:PHAS VH FC ← MRInit ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a virtual hierarchies flow control presence. Remote command: on page 1836 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VHFC...
  • Page 852 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Remote command: on page 1837 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:VLNR VH Absent ← MRInitInit FC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for absent virtual hierarchies (VH). Remote command: on page 1835 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:MULT:HABS TLP Type ← MRInitInit FC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC ← DLLP MRDLLP conditions Searches for a transaction layer type for a multi-root data link layer trigger type.
  • Page 853 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Sequence ← DLLP ACK/NAK conditions Searches for the sequence field indicating what TLPs are affected by the ACK/NAK. Remote command: on page 1838 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:SEQ DLLP Init FC1/InitFC2/UpdateFC conditions Searches for flow control initialization/update conditions. Credit Type ←...
  • Page 854 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) Vendor Pattern ← DLLP Vendor conditions Searches for a vendor pattern. Remote command: on page 1838 SEARch:TRIGger:PCIE:DLLP:VPAT Ordered set condition Searches for the enabled ordered sets. "SKP OS" Searches for an SKP ordered sets. "Training Seq Searches for a training sequence ordered set.
  • Page 855 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) "CRC16 error" Searches for 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. "LCRC error" Searches for link cyclic redundancy check (LCRC) errors. "ECRC error" Searches for end-to-end cyclic redundancy checksum (ECRC) errors. "Invalid sym- Searches for invalid symbol errors.
  • Page 856 ® Protocol Analysis R&S PCIe Gen 1/2 (Option R&S RTP-K72) The search results are listed in the search result table and marked in the waveform by blue lines. The "Show search zoom windows" function allows you to analyze the search results in more detail.

  • Page 857: Ddr3 (Option R&S Rtp-K91 )

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) 3. Tap "Source" and select the serial bus that is set to PCIe (e.g. "SB1"). 4. Specify the search criteria according to Chapter 12.18.6.1, "PCIe Gen 1/2 Search Settings", on page 846. 5.
  • Page 858 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) See also: Chapter 12.1.1, "Decode - General Settings", on page 469. Sets the channel for the data output signal. You can select analog channels "C1" to "C4", and also active math and reference waveforms as source.
  • Page 859 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) Remote command: on page 1853 BUS<m>:DDRThree:DATA:THReshold on page 1853 BUS<m>:DDRThree:STRBe:THReshold on page 1348 BUS<m>:SETReflevels Hysteresis Sets a value for the hysteresis of the respective lane. Remote command: on page 1852 BUS<m>:DDRThree:DATA:HYSTeresis on page 1852 BUS<m>:DDRThree:STRBe:HYSTeresis Bit rate...

  • Page 860: Search On Decoded Ddr3 Data

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) "Word" All words of each lane in stage 1 decoding. 12.19.1.3 Configuring the DDR3 Signals For configuration, assign the lanes to the input channels and define the logical thresh- olds and the hysteresis. 1.
  • Page 861 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) Figure 12-107: Example of search criteria for frame content in status frames You can define individual search parameters for the fields of the selected frame in the table below the "Search criteria". To specify these parameters, select a field in the table and define the data and/or index operators and values.
  • Page 862 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) 12.19.2.2 DDR3 Search Results To get search results, "Enable" the search in the "Control" section of the "Search Setup" dialog. You can minimize, shift or close the search dialog to better see the "Search Results"...

  • Page 863: Ddr3 Decode Results

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) ● on page 1866 SEARch:RESult:DDRThree:FRAMe<m>:STOP? ● on page 1866 SEARch:RESult:DDRThree:FRAMe<m>:TYPE? 12.19.2.3 Searching for DDR3 Data Prerequisite: A serial bus is configured for the DDR3 signal to be decoded and ana- lyzed. The search for events is set up in the following way: 1.
  • Page 864 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) Example The example shows a decoded DDR3 read and write cycles and the result tables. Figure 12-109: DDR3 : decoded signal and decode table Table 12-34: Content of the decode result table Column Description Frame...

  • Page 865: Ddr Eye Diagram Analysis

    ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) ● Chapter 6.1.3, "Zooming for Details", on page 236 Export of decode results You can export the decode results to a CSV or HTML file: 1. Press the [Save Recall] key on the left. 2.
  • Page 866 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) Figure 12-110: Eye diagrams of a DDR You can define up to four eye diagrams and configure them independently. Each eye diagram is shown in a separate display diagram, which has its own signal icon. You can move and minimize eye diagrams like any waveform diagram and analyze all eye diagrams in parallel.
  • Page 867 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) 12.19.4.2 Eye Diagram Setup This chapter describes the configuration of eye diagrams. The configuration of an eye diagram mainly consists of the selection and setup of the input source and timing reference source. You can also adjust display settings and restrict the segments that contribute to the eye generation by various means.
  • Page 868 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) You can configure and analyze up to four independent eye diagrams in parallel (vertical subtabs E1 to E4). Make sure to select the correct eye diagram subtab on the left before you adjust the settings. State..........................868 Source (Main)......................868...
  • Page 869 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) If you perform eye diagram analysis on the DDR3 serial protocol, select the serial bus here. The instrument determines the timing information according to protocol specifics. Remote command: on page 1867 EYE<m>:TREFerence[:SOURce] Mode Selects the method to extract timing information from an analog timing source.
  • Page 870 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) Remote command: on page 1868 EYE<m>:HORizontal:ABSolute:RANGe on page 1869 EYE<m>:HORizontal:ABSolute:POSition Bit rate, Range UI, Position UI Define the horizontal scale in unit intervals. A unit interval typically corresponds to a bit in the input data signal.
  • Page 871 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) Color table assignment Like any other waveform, you can show the eye waveform in solid color, or apply a color table. If you select solid color, the intensity of the waveform is proportional to the number Z of waveform slice points that hit a point (X,Y).
  • Page 872 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) You can configure and analyze up to four independent eye diagrams in parallel (vertical subtabs E1 to E4). Make sure to select the correct eye diagram subtab on the left before you adjust the settings. Gate Restricts the contributing slices in horizontal direction.
  • Page 873 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) Signal Sets a waveform-based qualification for the eye generation. The voltage level of a waveform is compared with a threshold, and only if this condition is fulfilled, the slices contribute to the eye generation. To apply the signal qualification, enable the "State".
  • Page 874 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) Mode Selects which bits contribute to the eye generation. "All bits" All bits contribute to the eye diagram, same as "State" = off. "Level transi- Only bits after a signal transition contribute (0 to 1, or 1 to 0). tion"...
  • Page 875 ® Protocol Analysis R&S DDR3 (Option R&S RTP-K91 ) 12.19.4.3 Measurements and Zoom on Eye Diagrams To analyze eye diagrams, you can use the following basic functions of the R&S RTP: ● Cursor measurements Cursors can be used on eye diagrams in the usual way. "Track waveform" is not supported.

  • Page 876: Mixed Signal Option (Mso, R&S Rtp-B1)

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital Channels and Parallel Buses 13 Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) The Mixed Signal Option R&S RTP-B1 adds logic analyzer functions to the classical oscilloscope functions. Using the MSO option, you can analyze and debug embedded systems with mixed-signal designs that use analog signals and correlated digital sig- nals simultaneously.

  • Page 877: Parallel Buses - Configuration

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital Channels and Parallel Buses 13.1.1 Parallel Buses - Configuration Access: "Analysis" menu > "Parallel buses" Digital channels can be displayed individually, and they can be grouped and displayed as a parallel bus. You can configure and enable up to 4 parallel buses. Each digital channel can be assigned to one active parallel bus only, the instrument disables con- flicting buses automatically.
  • Page 878 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital Channels and Parallel Buses If you have configured several parallel buses and you want to modify the settings, make sure that the tab of the correct bus is selected on the left side, and disable the bus before you change the settings.
  • Page 879 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital Channels and Parallel Buses Show dig. signals If enabled, the selected digital channels are shown in the diagram. Each channel is dis- played as a logic signal. Remote command: on page 1885 BUS<m>:PARallel:DISPlay:SHDI Show bus If enabled, the resulting bus signal and bus values are displayed in the diagram.
  • Page 880 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital Channels and Parallel Buses See also: "Bus representation" on page 879 Clocked bus setup If a bus is a clocked bus, one of the digital channels serves as clock of the bus. For an unclocked bus, the logical state of the bus is determined for each sample.
  • Page 881 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital Channels and Parallel Buses Signal selection In the table, you select and configure the digital channels that are used in the selected bus. "State" Enables a digital channel, and assigns it to the bus. "Label"...

  • Page 882: Parallel Buses - Digital Probes

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital Channels and Parallel Buses You can also set different thresholds for the individual channel groups: Disable "Cou- pling" and set the threshold value for each group. As long as the buses are disabled, you can set different thresholds for each bus.

  • Page 883: Using Digital Probes

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital Channels and Parallel Buses Dig. resolution Shows the current digital resolution of the digital channels. The maximum digital record length is always 200 MSa per digital channel. This number is independent of addition- ally installed memory.

  • Page 884: Configuring Digital Channels And Parallel Buses

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Digital Channels and Parallel Buses 2. Connect the ground lead on each set of channels (each pod) with a probe grabber. 3. Connect a grabber to one of the probes leads. 4. Connect the grabber to a node in the circuit you want to test. 5.

  • Page 885: Display

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Display ● Use the same value for all digital channels and all parallel buses: Enable "Cou- pling" and set one threshold value, either select a predefined "Technology" value or enter a user-defined value. ●...

  • Page 886: Parallel Bus - Decode Table

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Display To access and analyze one or more specific acquisitions, you can use the History Viewer in the common way. Furthermore, you can zoom in digital signals and bus signal in the same way as in ana- log waveforms.

  • Page 887: Trigger

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger 13.3 Trigger For digital trigger sources are all trigger types useful that require only one trigger level as trigger condition. This level is the logical threshold. Possible trigger sources are the individual digital channels, parallel bus signals, or any logical combination of digital channels.
  • Page 888 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Make sure that the trigger sequence is set to "A only". Also, you can define trigger holdoff conditions. See also Chapter 5.5, "Holdoff", on page 212. Source If the Mixed Signal Option is installed, the variety of trigger sources of the A-event setup is enhanced with specific digital trigger sources.
  • Page 889 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Figure 13-1: Edge trigger settings for trigger source = logical combination of digital channels (Logic) Slope Defines the edge - the state transition - of the signal. "Rising" Means a 0 to 1 transition of the state. "Falling"...
  • Page 890 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of a pulse to "Positive", "Negative", or "Both". When triggering on a positive pulse, the trigger event occurs on the high to low transi- tion of the pulse if the timing condition is true. When triggering on a negative pulse, the trigger event occurs on the low to high transition of the pulse if the timing condition is true.
  • Page 891 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger 13.3.1.4 Timeout The timeout trigger event checks if the trigger source signal stays above or below the threshold voltage for a specified time lapse. In other words, the event occurs if the state condition remains unchanged for the specified time.
  • Page 892 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger 13.3.1.5 State The state trigger detects the logical state of several logically combined digital channels at a given clock edge. The trigger source is a logical combination of digital channels or a parallel bus.
  • Page 893 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger 13.3.1.6 Pattern The pattern trigger identifies a logical state of several logically combined digital chan- nels (pattern) and a time limitation (holdoff). The pattern definition is defined by the log- ical expression, if "Logic" is used for trigger source. For a parallel bus trigger source, the pattern is defined by setting the state of each digital channel.
  • Page 894 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger "Width" Sets a pulse width as timing condition, see "Width settings" on page 894. The pulse starts when the pattern comes true, and the trigger event occurs when the pattern comes false during the specified time limit.
  • Page 895 ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger For the ranges "Within" and "Outside", the width defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits "±Delta". Remote command: on page 1894 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:PATTern:WIDTh[:WIDTh] ±Delta ← Width settings Defines a range around the given width value.

  • Page 896: Triggering On Digital Signals And Parallel Buses

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Trigger Logical expression Defines a logic combination of several digital channels as trigger condition if "Logic" is set for "Source". The "Qualification Editor" supports the entry of the expression. Remote command: on page 1889 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:TIMeout:EXPRession[:DEFine] on page 1889 TRIGger<m>:PARallel:STATe:EXPRession[:DEFine]...

  • Page 897: Measurements On Digital Channels

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Data Export 13.4 Measurements on Digital Channels For measurements on digital channels, the number of measurement categories and types is reduced to applicable measurement. These are: ● Period ● Frequency ● Positive and negative pulse ●...

  • Page 898: Mathematics

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Mathematics The xport of raw data is not available. Export of a digital channel If the data of digital channels is stored in BIN format, 1 bit is written for each sample. 8 data samples are written in 1 byte (data word).

  • Page 899: Search

    ® Mixed Signal Option (MSO, R&S RTP-B1) R&S Search 13.7 Search Access: [Search] > "Setup" tab. It is also possible to search on digital channels for specified events. Search conditions use the same parameters as the trigger event definition, see Chapter 13.3.1, "Trigger Settings for Digital Signals and Parallel Buses",...

  • Page 900: Waveform Generator (Option R&S Rtp-B6)

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator 14 Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) The R&S RTP includes an integrated waveform generator which can generate input signals and patterns during testing. You can setup and output two waveform generators and a pattern generator. It is possi- ble to couple and synchronize the settings of the different generators and enable them on a trigger signal.

  • Page 901: General Settings

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator Make sure that the tab of the correct waveform generator is selected on the left side. The settings of the waveform generators are not affected by an instrument preset. Press "Preset Gen1/2"...

  • Page 902: Function Generator

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator ● Chapter 14.1.4, "Sweep", on page 912 ● Chapter 14.1.5, "Arbitrary", on page 913 Remote command: on page 1898 WGENerator<m>:SOURce Copy settings from Gen1/Gen2 Copies all settings from Gen1/Gen2 and applies them to Gen2/Gen1. Remote command: on page 1898 WGENerator<m>:ACOPy...
  • Page 903 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator "Sine" Generates a sine wave. You can set its Frequency and Period. "Square" Generates a square wave. You can set its Frequency, Period Duty cycle. "Ramp" Generates a ramp signal. You can set its Frequency, Period Symmetry.
  • Page 904 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator "Pulse" Generates a pulse signal. You can set the Frequency, Period Pulse width. "Cardinal sine" Generates a cardinal sine wave. You can set the Frequency Period. "Cardiac" Generates a cardiac signal. You can set the Frequency and Period.
  • Page 905 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator "Lorentz" Generates a Lorentz signal . You can set the Frequency and Period. "Exp. rise" Generates an exponential rise signal. You can set the Frequency Period. "Exp. fall" Generates an exponential fall signal.

  • Page 906: Modulation

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator "Function type" Min frequency Max frequency "Cardiac" 0.001 Hz 1 MHz "Gauss" 0.001 Hz 25 MHz "Lorentz" 0.001 Hz 10 MHz "Exp.rise" 0.001 Hz 10 MHz "Ep. fall" 0.001 Hz 10 MHz The values of the "Frequency"...
  • Page 907 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator 14.1.3.1 General Settings Consists of settings for selecting the modulation type. Modulation type Selects the modulation type, which defines how the carrier signal is modified. "AM" Amplitude modulation. See: Chapter 14.1.3.2, "AM Modulation",...
  • Page 908 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator Remote command: on page 1902 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:CARRier:PERiod 14.1.3.2 AM Modulation For amplitude modulation (AM), the amplitude of the carrier signal is varied according to the modulation signal. Modulation signal Selects the type of the modulation signal for the AM modulation types.
  • Page 909 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator Remote command: on page 1902 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:AM:SYMMetry Duty cycle Sets the duty cycle for a square waveform. The duty cycle expresses for what percent- age fraction of the period, the waveform is active, i.e. the signal state is high. Remote command: on page 1901 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:AM:DCYCle...
  • Page 910 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator Remote command: on page 1906 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:PWM:DEPTh Symmetry Sets the symmetry for the ramp modulation waveform, the percentage of time that the waveform is rising. Remote command: on page 1906 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:PWM:SYMMetry Duty cycle Sets the duty cycle for a square waveform.
  • Page 911 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator Remote command: on page 1904 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:FM:FREQuency Symmetry Sets the symmetry for the ramp modulation waveform, the percentage of time that the waveform is rising. Remote command: on page 1904 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:FM:SYMMetry Freq deviation Sets the frequency deviation, the maximum difference between and FM modulated sig-...

  • Page 912: Sweep

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator Frequency 1 Sets the frequency of the first signal in FSK modulated signal. Remote command: on page 1904 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:FSK:FONE Frequency 2 Sets the frequency of the second signal in FSK modulated signal. Remote command: on page 1905 WGENerator<m>:MODulation:FSK:FTWO...

  • Page 913: Arbitrary

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator Stop freuqency Sets the stop frequency of the sweep signal. Remote command: on page 1907 WGENerator<m>:SWEep[:FEND] Sweep time Sets the duration of the sweep. Remote command: on page 1907 WGENerator<m>:SWEep:TIME 14.1.5 Arbitrary The arbitrary waveform generator allows you to output a user-defined waveform for...
  • Page 914 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator A sample rate of 1Mbps is used to calculate the waveform. You can change the "Sample rate" in the user interface. The voltage values are then played with this sample rate.
  • Page 915 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator 14.1.5.1 General Settings Arb wfm source Selects the arbitrary waveform source. You can load an existing file or load the current oscilloscope waveform. Remote command: on page 1910 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen[:SOURce] Running mode Selects the duration for which the signal of the arbitrary generator will be output after...
  • Page 916 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator 14.1.5.2 Saved Waveform For a saved waveform, the following settings are available: Load arbitrary waveform Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the selected file. Supported are .bin and .csv extension files.

  • Page 917: Output

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator 14.1.5.3 Scope Waveform For a scope waveform, the following settings are available: Signal source Selects the oscilloscope source, from which the arbitrary signal is loaded. Remote command: on page 1910 WGENerator<m>:ARBGen:SELect Load Loads the waveform from the selected "Signal source".

  • Page 918: Noise

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Waveform Generator Remote command: on page 1912 WGENerator<m>:VOLTage:LOW Inversion Inverts the waveform at the offset level. Remote command: on page 1912 WGENerator<m>:VOLTage:INVersion User Load Select the user load, the load of the DUT at its connection. You can select either a "50Ω"...

  • Page 919: Setup Of The Pattern Generator

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Pattern Generator 14.2 Setup of the Pattern Generator Access: "Wave Gen" > "PG" tab. The pattern generator outputs parallel patterns. Using pattern generator accessories The pattern generator with connected Patt Gen Cable and Patt Gen Board (1329.7054.02) is considered as a test probe, EN 61326-2-1, clause 5.2.4.101, note 1.
  • Page 920 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Pattern Generator Content and format of the R&S*.csv files The file's header have the following structure: ● Bit rate [double]: the number of transmitted bits per second. The value is reflected in the user interface.
  • Page 921 ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Setup of the Pattern Generator ● Bit rate [double] ● High level [double] ● Mask [string of 8 characters made up of "X"/"1"/"0"] ● Number of samples [UINT32] ● Data samples [UINT8] * number of samples Enable Enables the waveform generator/ pattern generator and outputs the signal to the con- nectors.

  • Page 922: Coupling And Sync Settings

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Coupling and Sync Settings 14.3 Coupling and Sync Settings Access: "Wave Gen" > "Coupling & Sync" tab. In the R&S RTP, you can couple certain settings of the available waveform generators. If one of the available coupling options is enabled for one of the generators, then you cannot change the coupled parameters at the "Setup"...

  • Page 923: Configuring The Waveform Generator

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Configuring the Waveform Generator "Couple all amplitude parameters except Inversion and Load" All amplitude parameters of the generators are coupled: ● For all "Operation Mode": the output settings except of "Load" and "Inversion", "Amplitude", "High", "Offset" and "Low". ●...

  • Page 924: Configuring A Modulation Waveform

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Configuring the Waveform Generator 7. Press the "Enable" button, to output the waveform at the output connector of the waveform generator. 14.4.2 Configuring a Modulation Waveform Generating an AM modulated waveform 1. Press the [Gen 1] key on the front panel. 2.

  • Page 925: Configuring A Sweep Waveform

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Configuring the Waveform Generator 4. Tap "Modulation type" and select "FM". 5. Set the "Carrier frequency" and the "Carrier period". 6. Tap "Modulation signal" and select the required waveform. 7. Depending on the selected "Modulation signal", configure the settings of the wave- form like "Modulation freq"...

  • Page 926: Configuring A Pattern Generator Waveform

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S Configuring the Waveform Generator 3. Under "Operation mode", enable the "Arbitrary" button. 4. Set the "Arb wfm source" to "Saved waveform". 5. Select the "Run mode". 6. Press "Open" and set the path to your saved arbitrary waveform. 7.

  • Page 927: Dc Offset Alignment

    ® Waveform Generator (Option R&S RTP-B6) R&S DC Offset Alignment 14.5 DC Offset Alignment Access: "Wave Gen" > "DC offset Allignment" tab Start Alignement Starts the alignment of the DC offset. Remote command: on page 1917 GENerator:ALIGnment:DC[:STARt] Date Displays the date of the last performed DC offset alignment. Remote command: on page 1917 GENerator:ALIGnment:DC:RESult:DATE?

  • Page 928: Pulse Source (Option R&S Rtp-B7)

    ® Pulse Source (Option R&S RTP-B7) R&S 15 Pulse Source (Option R&S RTP-B7) The pulse source option R&S RTP-B7 provides a symmetrical differential pulse signal with steep rise time and configurable parameters. The hardware module of the option features four 2.92 mm connectors (K type), two for signal output (Out, ), and two for reference signal output (Ref, Beside the pulse source module, the option includes several accessories: SMA cables,...

  • Page 929: Settings For The Pulse Source

    ® Pulse Source (Option R&S RTP-B7) R&S Settings for the Pulse Source Typical applications of the pulse source are: ● Stimulus for devices under test, for example, as a precise clock ● Accurate source for deskewing cables and probes for differential measurements ●...
  • Page 930 ® Pulse Source (Option R&S RTP-B7) R&S Settings for the Pulse Source Enable Switches all four pulse source outputs on and off. Remote command: on page 1918 PSRC[:STAT] Output level Sets the low level of the output pulse. The high level is 0 V and cannot be changed. Remote command: on page 1918 PSRC:OUTPutlow...
  • Page 931 ® Pulse Source (Option R&S RTP-B7) R&S Settings for the Pulse Source "Free running" The clock of the pulse source is independent. Deviations of the sys- tem do not affect the pulse clock, and deterministic conditions are avoided. If the waveform aquisition is set to "Average", the "free running" clock mode can improve the measurement result.

  • Page 932: Jitter Analysis And Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S Rtp-K12).932

    ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements 16 Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) Jitter describes the timing errors in a system. It is a significant and undesired factor in high-speed serial communication designs because it causes transmission errors. The jitter analysis option R&S RTP-K12 provides common analysis and visualization tools for signal integrity analysis and jitter characterization: ●...

  • Page 933: Jitter Measurements

    ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements After selecting and setting up the measurement, you can adjust the scaling and the ref- erence levels, and decide which results you want to see: ● Source signals ●...
  • Page 934 ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements Table 16-1: Jitter measurements Measurement Description/Result ∆ Cycle-cycle jitter Difference between the periods of two adjacent cycles. The measure- ment is based on the period measurement. You can select the slope and the reference level on which the period is measured.

  • Page 935: Jitter Measurement Settings

    ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements Measurement Description/Result Data rate Frequency of the clock signal. If no clock signal is available, it is recov- ered by CDR. The measurement is based on the unit interval mea- surement.
  • Page 936 ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements Active Measurements The "Active Measurements" list shows the measurements that are selected in the selected category. At least, one measurement must be selected. If further settings are available for a measurement, a settings icon is shown beside the measurement's name.
  • Page 937 ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements Cycle begin Selects the slope at which the periods and thus the jitter is measured. The setting is available for the following measurements: cycle-cycle jitter, N-cycle jitter, and cycle-cycle duty cycle.
  • Page 938 ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements Remote command: on page 1921 MEASurement<m>:JITTer:PULSe Number of cycles Sets the number of periods (cycles) that are accumulated to measure the N-cycle jitter. ΔT Ncycle1 Ncycle2 Ncycle1 Ncycle1 Ncycle2 N periods...
  • Page 939 ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements "Software CDR The clock is generated by a software algorithm. The R&S RTP pro- 1 / 2" vides two setups for software CDR, which can be configured and used independently.
  • Page 940 ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements of the "Delay" and "Phase" measurements assuming that both sources are similar except for the delay. See also: Table 16-1 ► To configure a measurement, tap it in the "Active Measurements" list. Source 1, Source 2 "Source 1"...

  • Page 941: Jitter Statistics And Histogram

    ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Jitter Measurements 16.1.4 Jitter Statistics and Histogram Since jitter is a random component of all signals, statistical measurement results are required to characterize the jitter. To get measurements statistics of a jitter measurement Prerequisite: the jitter measurements are selected and configured, and the measure- ment group is active.

  • Page 942: Jitter Spectrum

    ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Clock Data Recovery Figure 16-1: TIE measurement with CDR trigger, 10 Mbps, with track and histogram 16.1.6 Jitter Spectrum An extension of jitter measurements is the FFT analysis of track waveforms of jitter measurements.

  • Page 943: Software Cdr

    ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Clock Data Recovery 16.2.1 Software CDR You can define two independent software CDR instances to recover clock signals. These clock signals are used for data timing measurements: time interval error, unit interval, and data rate (frequency of the clock signal).
  • Page 944 ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Clock Data Recovery Nominal bit rate Sets the quiescent frequency of the PLL. It corresponds to the data rate of the data stream from which the clock is to be recovered. Remote command: on page 1925 CDR:SOFTware<m>:BITRate...

  • Page 945: Displaying The Recovered Clock Signal

    ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Mask Testing on Eye Diagrams Initial phase sync. Defines the phase reference for the first clock edge. "First sample" The first clock edge matches the first sample of the waveform at the left border of the display.
  • Page 946 ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Mask Testing on Eye Diagrams You can select the shape of the eye, enter its dimensions and position the eye on the display. For mask configuration details, see Chapter 9.4.1, "Test Definition for Eye Mask Tests", on page 397 and...
  • Page 947 ® Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12) R&S Mask Testing on Eye Diagrams Example: The mask test is set to stop on violation. When an error occurred, the history mode is used to show the cause of the failure. In this case, a single bit transition after a long run caused the error (12 ones followed by a single zero).

  • Page 948: Deembedding (Option R&S Rtp-K121/-K122)

    ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Configuring the Measurement Setup for Deembedding 17 Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/- K122) Deembedding removes the parasitic effects of the measurement setup from the mea- sured signal. A simple measurement setup consists of a probe only, but more complex setups include also cables, fixtures and other components.

  • Page 949: Deembedding Settings

    ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings Proceed as follows: 1. Open the "Analysis" menu. 2. Select "Deembedding". 3. Select the input channel to which the measurement setup is connected. 4. Add the components of the measurement setup: a) Tap the "+" icon. b) Select the component type.
  • Page 950 ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings Enable Activates the deembedding - the correction of parasitic effects of the measurement setup on the measured signal. Remote command: on page 1928 DEEMbedding<m>[:STATe] Effective bandwidth Sets the maximum bandwidth until which the signal is corrected. This maximum value is the minimum bandwidth value of the probe bandwidth, tip module bandwidth (R&S RT-ZM) and oscilloscope bandwidth, and can not be higher than the highest fre- quency in a used S-parameter file.

  • Page 951: Common Settings For Components

    ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings If disabled, the deembedding calculation is done by software. This method is slower, therefore, triggering on the corrected signal is not possible. Remote command: on page 1930 DEEMbedding<m>:REALtime Meas setup definition Simulates the complete measurement setup with all components. To add a component, tap the + icon and select the component type: cable, fixture, adapter, or others ("Custom").

  • Page 952: Dut Settings

    ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings Enable Enables the component for deembedding. As long as the configuration is incomplete or conflicting, the message "Invalid configuration" is shown, and enabling is not possible. Remote command: on page 1932 DEEMbedding<m>:COMPonent<n>[:STATe] Component Selects the component type.
  • Page 953 ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings Probing, Terminating Sets the probing mode. Select "Probing" if you use a high-ohmic probe and measure on an existing line in par- allel to the load. Select "Terminating" if the measuring equipment is the load of the line. Remote command: on page 1076 PROBe<m>:DEEMbedding:MODE...

  • Page 954: R&S Rt-Zm Probe Settings

    ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings "Constant" The source impedance is a constant value over frequency. Enter the value in Source impedance. "Touchstone" Use this setting if the DUT impedance depends on the frequency. The impedance of the DUT over frequency is described by S-parameters, which are saved in a Touchstone file.

  • Page 955: Input Settings For Other Probes

    ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings Probe settings that are important for deembedding can be set directly in the deembed- ding dialog. To get all probe deembedding settings: 1. In the "Deembedding" > "Components" > "RT-ZMxx" tab, select "More Settings". 2.

  • Page 956: Cable, Adapter, Fixture And Custom Settings

    ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings For details, see: ● "Use skew offset" on page 178 ● "Skew offset" on page 178 17.2.6 Cable, Adapter, Fixture and Custom Settings If you have added a cable, adapter, test fixture or other component to the measure- ment setup, you set the characteristics in the corresponding subtabs of the "Deembed- ding"...
  • Page 957 ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings To configure a component in a single-ended 2-port setup 1. Tap "Open". 2. Select and load the *.s2p Touchstone file that contains the S-parameters of the component. The filetype is always *.s2p. 3.
  • Page 958 ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings Figure 17-3: 4-port setup and 2-port component: deembedding settings of identical cables Figure 17-4: 4-port setup and 2-port component: deembedding settings of different cables To configure a component in a single-ended 4-port setup 1.
  • Page 959 ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Deembedding Settings a) Tap "Open". b) Select and load the *.s4p Touchstone file. The filetype is always *.s4p. 2. If the component is a 2-port, i.e. a cable or adapter, typically 2 cables or adapters are used.

  • Page 960: Responses

    ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Responses Identical Paths The setting is relevant if the measurement setup is a 4-port, and the component is a 2- port. Usually, these components are cables and adapters, which are described by *.s2p files. If there is a 4-port setup, 2 cables or 2 adapters are used. If there is no crosstalk in-between, each cable or adapter can be described by a *.s2p file.

  • Page 961: Responses Of The Measurement Setup

    ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Responses Port selection Selects the S-parameter. The response curves (magnitude, phase, and group delay response) of the setup cascade for the selected parameter are shown. You can refresh each graphic, and display it on full screen. 17.3.2 Responses of the Measurement Setup On the "Deembedding"...
  • Page 962 ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Responses Figure 17-5: Characteristics of the deembedded measurement setup ► To see more details in a response graphic, tap the upper right button in the graphic. The graphic opens in full view, where you can analyze the response function: zoom in and out, use the cursor.
  • Page 963 ® Deembedding (Option R&S RTP-K121/-K122) R&S Responses On the "Response" tab, you see also some parameters of the uncorrected measure- ment setup including the DUT. All parameters are related to a frequency range from DC to the configured effective bandwidth. Maximum attenuation of the measurement setup before deembedding, with reference to a frequency response normalized at DC to 0 dB.

  • Page 964: Compliance Tests

    ® Compliance Tests R&S USB 2.0 Compliance Test (Option R&S RTP-K21) 18 Compliance Tests Thanks to the high measurement accuracy of the R&S RTP, the oscilloscope can be used for reliable compliance testing on the physical layer of high-speed bus interfaces. For fast and easy compliance testing, you need the free-of-charge R&S ScopeSuite.

  • Page 965: Ethernet Compliance Tests (Option R&S Rtp-K22/K23/K25/K86)

    ® Compliance Tests R&S Ethernet Compliance Tests (Option R&S RTP-K22/K23/K25/K86) For full speed and low speed compliance tests, a 4-channel R&S RTP with less than 2 GHz bandwidth is sufficient. ● R&S RT-ZF1 USB 2.0 compliance test fixture set, which consists of the load board and the signal quality board.
  • Page 966 ® Compliance Tests R&S Ethernet Compliance Tests (Option R&S RTP-K22/K23/K25/K86) – For energy-efficient Ethernet tests, in addition: R&S RTP-K86 EEE test option R&S RT-ZF5 Ethernet test fixture set for 100/1000BASE-T EEE tests R&S RT-ZF4 test fixture for 10BASE-Te tests ● 2.5GBASE-T Ethernet compliance tests: –...

  • Page 967: D-Phy Compliance Tests (Option R&S Rtp-K26)

    ® Compliance Tests R&S D-PHY Compliance Tests (Option R&S RTP-K26) – R&S RT-ZF2 Ethernet test fixture set – R&S RT-ZF3 Frequency converter for test cases that require an ARB generator ● The free-of-charge R&S ScopeSuite software, which can be installed on a com- puter or directly on the oscilloscope.

  • Page 968: Network And Remote Operation

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Operating System 19 Network and Remote Operation This chapter describes the usage of the embedded operating system on the instru- ment, the setup of network connections, and the interfaces and protocols used for remote control. It also explains how to start a remote control session. This chapter contains the following sections: ●...
  • Page 969 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Operating System and the password must be identical under Windows and on the network. The instru- ment provides an auto-logon function that can be configured for standard user and administrator access. The configuration requires the user name and password. See also: "Log on as"...

  • Page 970: Service Packs And Updates

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Operating System 4. Sign out from the operating system. and 5. Log on as administrator ("Instrument"). 6. Set the "Logon as" to "Admin autologon". Enter the "User name": Instrument and the administrator's password. 7. Restart the instrument. 19.1.2 Service Packs and Updates Microsoft regularly creates security updates and other patches to protect Windows- based operating systems.
  • Page 971 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Operating System 3. When the boot screen is displayed, immediately select "Backup", and press [ENTER]. 4. Select "Create Backup". 5. Enter a name for the backup and the date. If necessary, you can add information to the description.

  • Page 972: Accessing Windows Functionality

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection 2. When the boot screen is displayed, immediately select "Backup", and press [ENTER]. 3. Select the backup that you want to delete. 4. Select "Delete Selected". 5. Confirm with "Yes". 6.

  • Page 973: Connecting The Instrument To The Network

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection appropriate rights and adapted the Windows firewall configuration, you can use the interface, for example: ● To transfer data between a controlling device and the test device, e.g. to run a remote control program.

  • Page 974: Assigning The Ip Address

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection ► To establish a non-dedicated network connection, connect a commercial RJ-45 cable to one of the LAN ports. To establish a dedicated connection, connect a (crossover) RJ-45 cable between the instrument and a single PC.

  • Page 975: Using Computer Names

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection 8. Enter the address information as obtained from the network administrator. 19.2.3 Using Computer Names In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru- ment connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address.
  • Page 976 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection 6. On the "Networking" tab, select "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)", and then select "Properties". User Manual 1337.9952.02 ─ 05...

  • Page 977: Changing The Windows Firewall Settings

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection 7. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter your own DNS addresses. For more information, refer to the Windows operating system help. 19.2.4 Changing the Windows Firewall Settings A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network.

  • Page 978: Web Interface

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Web Interface 19.3 Web Interface If the R&S RTP is connected to a computer via LAN, you can operate the instrument from a computer. No additional tools are required, you need only a web browser. 19.3.1 Settings on the R&S RTP Access: "File"...

  • Page 979: Web Browser

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Web Interface Parameter Value TCP/IP mode DHCP + auto IP address Dynamic DNS Enabled ICMP ping Enabled Password for LAN configuration LxiWebIfc The LAN settings are configured using the instrument's web browser. 19.3.2 Web Browser The instrument's web interface works with all W3C compliant browsers.
  • Page 980 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Web Interface ► To update the "Host Name", press the "Device Indicator" button. The "Device Indi- cator" is not password-protected. The most important items in the navigation menu of the browser interface are the fol- lowing : ●...
  • Page 981 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Web Interface The "TCP/IP Mode" configuration field controls how the IP address for the instrument gets assigned (see also Chapter 19.2.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 974). For the manual configuration mode, the static IP address, subnet mask, and default gate- way are used to configure the LAN.
  • Page 982 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Web Interface 3. Click "Submit". 19.3.2.2 Web Control "Web Control" emulates the front panel and shows the instrument display. You see a live image of the instrument, and you can operate the instrument remotely. You can use the keys, the knobs and the menus in the same way as directly on the instrument.

  • Page 983: Remote Desktop Connection

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Desktop Connection Add MetaData to Screenshot Adds the instrument information to PNG and JPG files. Meta information is saved as EXIF information and can be read, for example, using the ExifTool, see "Meta informa- tion in screenshots"...
  • Page 984 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Desktop Connection To set up a Remote Desktop connection 1. Enable remote desktop control on the instrument. See "Enabling remote desktop control on the instrument" on page 984 for details. 2. Connect the instrument and the remote computer to a LAN. See Chapter 19.2.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network",...

  • Page 985: Remote Control Interfaces And Protocols

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols Helpful settings for Remote Desktop The following settings for the Remote Desktop connection can make working on the remote PC more convenient. 1. When setting up the connection to the instrument, you can configure the connec- tion settings in the "Remote Desktop Connection"...

  • Page 986: Visa Libraries

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols Table 19-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Protocols, VISA address string Remarks Local Area Protocol HiSLIP The LAN connector is located on rear panel of the Network instrument. VISA address string: (LAN) TCPIP::<host address>::...

  • Page 987: Lan Interface

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols 19.5.2 LAN Interface To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting of a connector, a network interface card and protocols. For remote control via a net- work, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a com- mon network with TCP/IP network protocol.

  • Page 988: Gpib Interface (Iec/Ieee Bus Interface)

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols 19.5.2.2 VXI-11 Protocol The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC RPC (Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call) protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP as the network/transport layer. The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured.

  • Page 989: Remote Settings

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Settings ● The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m; the cable length between two instruments should not exceed 2m. ● A wired "OR"-connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel. 19.5.3.1 GPIB Instrument Address To operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the GPIB...
  • Page 990 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Settings Transfer data format Selects the data format that is used for transmission of waveform data from the instru- ment to the controlling computer. Waveform data can be retrieved using the following commands: ●...

  • Page 991: Starting And Stopping Remote Control

    ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Starting and Stopping Remote Control 19.7 Starting and Stopping Remote Control 19.7.1 Starting a Remote Control Session When you switch on the instrument, it is always in manual operation state ("local" state). It can be operated via the front panel, the touch screen and external keyboard and/or mouse.

  • Page 992: Remote Control Commands

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S 20 Remote Control Commands This chapter describes all remote commands available for R&S RTP and provides examples and information how to use the commands. Further information on remote control: ● Chapter 19.5, "Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols", on page 985 ●...
  • Page 993 ® Remote Control Commands R&S 20.8.2 Time Base......................... 1044 20.8.3 Acquisition.........................1049 20.8.4 Fast Segmentation....................1053 20.8.5 Vertical........................1054 20.8.6 Waveform Data......................1058 20.8.7 Probes........................1060 20.8.8 R&S RT-ZVC Probe....................1083 20.8.9 Digital Filter....................... 1094 20.8.10 Skew......................... 1095 20.8.11 AUX OUT........................1096 20.8.12 High Definition Mode....................1097 20.8.13...
  • Page 994 ® Remote Control Commands R&S 20.9.21 Zone Trigger (Option R&S RTP-K19)................ 1141 20.9.22 External Trigger Input....................1142 20.9.23 Acquisition Info......................1142 20.10 Waveform Analysis....................1143 20.10.1 Zoom......................... 1143 20.10.2 Reference Waveforms....................1151 20.10.3 Mathematics......................1159 20.10.4 History........................1163 20.10.5 XY-Diagram....................... 1168 20.11 Cursor Measurements....................
  • Page 995 ® Remote Control Commands R&S 20.14.3 Mask Definition: Waveform Mask................1271 20.14.4 Event Actions......................1273 20.14.5 Mask Display......................1275 20.14.6 Results........................1277 20.14.7 Eye Mask Testing ..................... 1280 20.15 Search........................1283 20.15.1 General Search Settings................... 1284 20.15.2 Basic Trigger Search Conditions................1286 20.15.3 Edge Search Conditions...................
  • Page 996 ® Remote Control Commands R&S 20.16.10 Reports........................1345 20.17 Protocols........................1347 20.17.1 Configuration Settings for all Serial Protocols............1347 20.17.2 Trigger Settings for all Serial Protocols..............1352 20.17.3 I²C (Option R&S RTP-K1)..................1353 20.17.4 SPI (Option R&S RTP-K1)..................1385 20.17.5 UART/RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (Option R&S RTP-K2)..........1405 20.17.6 CAN (Option R&S RTP-K3/R&S RTP-K9)..............

  • Page 997: Conventions Used In Remote Command Description

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S Conventions used in Remote Command Description 20.20 Pulse Source (Option R&S RTP-B7)..............1918 20.21 Jitter Analysis and Clock Data Recovery (Option R&S RTP-K12)......1919 20.21.1 Jitter Measurements (Option R&S RTP-K12)............1919 20.21.2 Clock Data Recovery (Software-based, Option R&S RTP-K12)....... 1924 20.21.3 Eye Mask Testing......................

  • Page 998: Finding The Appropriate Command

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S Programming Examples A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com- mand starts executing (overlapping command) is indicated as an Asynchronous command. ● Reset values (*RST) Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument (*RST command) are indicated as *RST values, if available.

  • Page 999: Display

    ® Remote Control Commands R&S Programming Examples 20.3.3 Mask Testing......................1003 20.3.3.1 Creating a user mask....................1003 20.3.4 Search........................1003 20.3.4.1 Searching for a pulse of specified width..............1003 20.3.5 Data Management.....................1004 20.3.5.1 Saving a Screenshot to File..................1004 20.3.5.2 Exporting Waveform Data to File................1004 20.3.5.3 Exporting Measurement Results to File..............
  • Page 1000 ® Remote Control Commands R&S Programming Examples Simple Frequency and Amplitude Measurement SING;*OPC? //Asynchronous command MEAS1:SOUR C1W1 // Configure frequency measurement MEAS1:MAIN FREQ MEAS1 ON MEAS2:SOUR C1W1 // Configure amplitude measurement MEAS2:MAIN AMPL MEAS2 ON *OPC? // Wait for operation complete - read result of *OPC? MEAS1:RES:ACT? // Get frequency result MEAS2:RES:ACT?

This manual is also suitable for:

Rtp0441320.5007k061320.5007k081320.5007k04Rtp084Rtp064

Table of Contents